TM
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice at the discretion
of NEC America, Inc. This document has been prepared for the use of
employees and customers of NEC America, Inc. and may not be reproduced
without prior written approval of NEC America, Inc.
InfoSet is a trademark of NEC America, Inc., Dterm and Electra Elite are registered
trademarks of NEC America, Inc. Windows and Microsoft Internet Explorer are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Netscape and Netscape
Communicator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications
Corporation.
Copyright 2000
NEC America, Inc.
1555 Walnut Hill Lane
Irving, TX 75038
Business Terminals Division
Regulatory Information
GENERAL
INFORMATION
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules that
permit this telephone system to be directly connected to the telephone
network. A jack is provided by the telephone company. Jacks for this type of
customer provided equipment are not provided on party lines or coin lines.
The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and
procedures. If such changes affect the compatibility or use of the InfoSet 408
system, the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of the
changes.
COMPANY
NOTIFICATION
Before connecting this telephone system to the telephone network, the
following information must be provided to the telephone company:
1. Your telephone Number.
2. FCC registration number:
If the system is to be installed as a Key Function system (no dial
access to outside lines), use the following number:
AY5-THA-40116-KF-E
If the system is to be installed as a Multifunction system (Dial "9"
access to outside lines), use the following number:
AY5-THA-40117-MF-E
The following table lists the Facility Interface Codes (FIC), Ringer Equivalent
Numbers (REN), Service Order Codes (SOC), and Jack Types for the
interface ETUs.
FIC, REN, SOC, and Jack Types for InfoSet 408 System ETUs
Interface ETU Type
FIC
REN
SOC
Jack
BRT(1)-B10 ETU
02IS5
N/A
6.0P
N/A
RJ11C
COI(2)-B10 ETU (Loop Start)
02LS2
2.1B
N/A
RJ21X
System Manual
1
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
INCIDENCE OF HARM
If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be causing harm to the telephone
network. The telephone system should be disconnected until the source of
the problem can be determined and until repair has been made. If this is not
done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service.
RADIO FREQUENCY
INTERFERENCE
In compliance with FCC Part 15 rules, the following statement is provided:
IMPORTANT NOTE
"Except as noted below, this equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the installation
instructions, may cause interference to radio communications. This equipment has
been tested and approved for compliance with the limits for a Class B computing
device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules, that are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this telephone system in a residential area is likely to cause
interference, in which case, the user, at his or her own expense, is required to take
whatever measures may be required to correct the interference."
The following telephone sets are in compliance with Class B limits:
DTB-16-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTB-16D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
The following telephone sets are in compliance with Class A limits:
DTU-8-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-8D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-16-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-16D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-32-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-32D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTP-2DT-1 (WH) TEL
DTP-1-1 (WH) TEL
DTP-1HM-1 (WH) TEL
DTU-4R-1 (BK) TEL
ETW-4R-1 (BK) TEL
Note: If this system is to be used in a residential area, then only telephones
that meet Class B limits shall be used.
2
Regulatory Information
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
HEARING AID
COMPATIBILITY
The NEC Multiline telephones and NEC single line telephones that are
provided for this system are hearing aid compatible and comply with the
volume control requirements. The manufacturer of other single line
telephones for use with the system must provide notice of hearing aid
compatibility to comply with FCC rules that now prohibit the use of non-
hearing aid compatible telephones.
MUSIC ON HOLD
IMPORTANT NOTE
"In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the
American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar
organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold
feature of this telecommunication system. NEC America Inc., hereby disclaims
any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license."
SERVICE
REQUIREMENTS
If equipment malfunctions, all repairs will be performed by an authorized
agent of NEC America, Inc. or by NEC America, Inc. The user requiring
service is responsible for reporting the need for service to an NEC
America, Inc. authorized agent or to NEC America, Inc.
SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS
High Leakage Current
Connect permanent earthing conductor before connecting telephone lines.
A supplementary equipment earthing conductor is to be installed
between the product or system and earth, that is, in addition to the
equipment earthing conductor in the power supply cord.
The supplementary equipment earthing conductor may not be
smaller in size than the unearthed branch circuit supply
conductors. The supplementary equipment earthing conductor is
to be connected to the product at the terminal provided, and
connected to earth in a manner that will retain the earth connection
when the power supply cord is unplugged. The connection to earth
of the supplementary earthing conductor shall be in compliance
with the appropriate rules for terminating bonding jumpers in Part K
of Article 250 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, and
Article 10 of Part 1 of the Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, C22.1.
System Manual
3
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Termination of the supplementary equipment earthing conductor is
permitted to be made to building steel, to a metal electrical raceway
system, or to an earthed item that is permanently and reliably
connected to the electrical service equipment earthed.
Bare, covered or insulated earthing conductors are acceptable. A
covered or insulated earthing conductor must have a continuous
outer finish that is either green or green with one or more yellow
stripes.
UL 1950
INFORMATION
This equipment has been listed by Underwriters Laboratories and found to
comply with all applicable requirements of the standard for information
technology equipment, UL1950, 3rd edition.
INDUSTRY CANADA
Industry Canada has established rules that permit this telephone system to
be directly connected to the telephone network. Prior to the connection or
disconnection of this telephone system to or from the telephone network, the
telephone company must be provided with the following information.
1. Your telephone number.
2. IC certification number: 14010421A
3. Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the equipment: 2.1B
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network
protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the
applicable Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The
Department does not guarantee that equipment operates to the user
satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to
be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.
The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative
designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to
this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the
equipment.
4
Regulatory Information
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water
pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be
particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contact the applicable electric inspection authority or electrician.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that
the sum of the Ringer Equivalent Numbers of all the devices does not
exceed 5.
This equipment complies with all applicable requirements of the Canadian
Standards Association standard for information technology equipment
C 22.2 No. 950, and bears the CUL mark.
This equipment meets IC requirements CS03.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference
regulations of Industry Canada.
Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radioelectriques
depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de Classe A
prescrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par
Industrie Canada.
BATTERY DISPOSAL
The InfoSet 408 system includes the batteries listed below. When
disposing of these batteries, KSUs, and/or ETUs, you must comply with
applicable federal and state regulations regarding proper disposal
procedures.
Battery Types and Quantities for KSUs and ETUs
Unit Name
Type of Battery
Quantity
B408-B10 KSU
Lead Acid
2
B408-B10 KSU
Lithium
1
DTP-1HM-1 (SW) TEL
Lithium
1
System Manual
5
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
The InfoSet 408 B408-B10 KSU provides memory backup (lithium battery)
for a minimum of two years.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
DO NOT PLACE USED BATTERIES IN YOUR REGULAR TRASH! THE
PRODUCT YOU PURCHASED CONTAINS A NICKEL-CADMIUM OR
SEALED LEAD BATTERY. NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD
BATTERIES MUST BE COLLECTED, RECYCLED, OR DISPOSED OF IN
AN ENVIRONMENTALLY SOUND MANNER.
The incineration, landfilling or mixing of nickel-cadmium or sealed lead
batteries with the municipal solid waste stream is PROHIBITED BY LAW in
most areas. Contact your local solid waste management officials for other
information regarding the environmentally sound collection, recycling, and
disposal of the battery.
Nickel-Cadmium (or sealed lead) batteries must be returned to a federal or
state approved nickel-cadmium (or sealed lead) battery recycler. This may
be where the batteries were originally sold or a local seller of automotive
batteries. Contact your local waste management officials for other
information regarding the environmentally sound collection, recycling and
disposal of the battery contained in this product. For Ni-Cd batteries, you
can also call 1-800-8-BATTERYSM if further information is required.
The packaging for the InfoSet 408 system contains the following labels
regarding proper disposal.
6
Regulatory Information
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING
CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY.
BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED OR
DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT BE
DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Ni-Cd
CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY.
BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED. MUST NOT
BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Pb
System Manual
7
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 System Overview
Section 1
Your System .................................................................................... 1-1
Section 2
Equipment ........................................................................................ 1-1
Section 3
Power Requirements ...................................................................... 1-5
3.1
Power Supply Inputs ....................................................................1-5
3.2
Power Supply Consumption ........................................................1-6
Section 4
Cabling Requirements and Specifications ................................... 1-6
Section 5
Environmental Conditions ............................................................. 1-8
5.1
Temperature ................................................................................1-8
5.2
Humidity .......................................................................................1-8
Section 6
Weights and Dimensions .............................................................. 1-8
Section 7
Outside Line Type ........................................................................... 1-9
Section 8
Network and Control ..................................................................... 1-10
8.1
Transmission, Network, and Control Specifications ..................1-10
8.1.1
Transmission ................................................................... 1-10
8.1.2
Network ........................................................................... 1-10
8.1.3
Control ............................................................................. 1-10
8.1.4
Telephone ....................................................................... 1-10
Section 9
External Equipment Connection .................................................. 1-11
9.1
Music Sources for Music on Hold via KSU ................................1-11
9.2
External Paging (Audio) via KSU ...............................................1-11
9.3
External Tone Ringer .................................................................1-12
9.4
SMDR Output ............................................................................1-12
System Manual
i
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
9.5
PC Connection .......................................................................... 1-12
9.6
Relay Contact ............................................................................ 1-12
Section 10
Battery Backup .............................................................................. 1-12
10.1
System Backup .......................................................................... 1-12
10.2
Memory Backup ......................................................................... 1-12
Chapter 2 Installation
Section 1
Basic Installation ............................................................................. 2-1
1.1
Unpacking the KSU ..................................................................... 2-1
1.2
Opening the KSU and Attaching the Batteries ............................ 2-2
1.3
Wall Mounting the KSU ............................................................... 2-5
1.4
Installing the External Speaker Relay Cable ............................... 2-7
Section 2
Installing Electronic Telephone Units ......................................... 2-10
2.1
Installing the ESI(3)-B10 ETU ................................................... 2-10
2.2
Installing the COI(2)-B10 ETU ................................................... 2-12
2.3
Installing the CID(2)-B10 UNIT .................................................. 2-15
2.4
Installing the SLI(2)-B10 ETU .................................................... 2-18
2.5
Installing the PBR-B10 ETU ...................................................... 2-21
2.6
Installing the MIF-B10 ETU ....................................................... 2-22
2.7
Installing the DPH-B10 ETU ...................................................... 2-25
Section 3
Installing Background Music for Music On Hold and External
Speakers for Paging ...................................................................... 2-29
Section 4
Connecting Telephones Cords .................................................... 2-30
4.1
Connecting InfoSet Telephones ................................................ 2-30
4.2
Connecting Electra Elite Telephones ........................................ 2-31
ii
Table of Contents
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Section 5
Installing a Dterm® Cordless Lite Telephone ............................... 2-32
5.1
Selecting an Installation Location ..............................................2-32
5.2
Connecting the Telephone Cords ..............................................2-33
5.3
Applying Power to the Base Unit ...............................................2-33
Section 6
Installing the Dterm® Cordless Telephone ................................... 2-34
6.1
Selecting an Installation Location ..............................................2-34
6.2
Connecting the Telephone Cords ..............................................2-35
6.3
Applying Power to the Base Unit ...............................................2-35
Section 7
Replacing Batteries and Fuses .................................................... 2-36
7.1
Replacing the Backup Batteries in the KSU ..............................2-36
7.2
Replacing the Lithium Batteries in the KSU ...............................2-39
7.3
Replacing a Fuse .......................................................................2-41
Chapter 3 Features
Section 1
Introduction ..................................................................................... 3-1
Section 2
Differences in Telephone Types .................................................... 3-1
All Call Page ................................................................................................ 3-3
Ancillary Device Connection ........................................................................ 3-5
Answer Hold ................................................................................................ 3-6
Answer Key ................................................................................................. 3-7
Attendant Positions...................................................................................... 3-8
Automatic Callback ...................................................................................... 3-9
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching ....................................................... 3-10
Automatic Hold .......................................................................................... 3-11
Automatic Pause - Behind PBX ................................................................. 3-12
Automatic Redial ....................................................................................... 3-13
Automatic Release .................................................................................... 3-16
Background Music - External Speakers .................................................... 3-17
System Manual
iii
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Background Music - Multiline Telephone Speakers................................... 3-18
Barge-In (Interrupting an External Call) ..................................................... 3-20
Battery Backup System Memory ............................................................ 3-22
Battery Backup System Power (Built-In)................................................. 3-23
Busy Lamp Field - Multiline Telephones .................................................... 3-24
Callback Request....................................................................................... 3-25
Call Elapsed Timer .................................................................................... 3-27
Call Forward - All Calls .............................................................................. 3-28
Call Forward Busy/No Answer ................................................................ 3-30
Caller Identification .................................................................................... 3-33
Caller ID Scrolling ...................................................................................... 3-34
Call Pickup Group ...................................................................................... 3-35
Call Restriction........................................................................................... 3-37
Call Restriction Override using System Speed Dial................................... 3-39
Call Transfer .............................................................................................. 3-40
Call Waiting Indication ............................................................................... 3-43
Character Registration ............................................................................... 3-44
Clock/Calendar Display ............................................................................. 3-47
Confirmation Dial ....................................................................................... 3-49
Conference Add-On ................................................................................... 3-51
Consecutive Speed Dial ............................................................................ 3-54
Digital Voice Mail ....................................................................................... 3-55
Delayed Ringing ........................................................................................ 3-56
Direct Inward Termination.......................................................................... 3-57
Direct Paging Access................................................................................. 3-58
Direct Station Selection ............................................................................. 3-60
Distinctive Ringing ..................................................................................... 3-62
Door Lock Release .................................................................................... 3-63
Door/Monitor Telephone ............................................................................ 3-64
Do Not Disturb (DND) ................................................................................ 3-66
iv
Table of Contents
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
DP to DTMF Switching .............................................................................. 3-67
Extension Hunting ..................................................................................... 3-69
Extension Name Assignment .................................................................... 3-71
External Paging (Meet-Me)........................................................................ 3-72
External Tone Ringer via External Speaker .............................................. 3-74
Flash Key................................................................................................... 3-75
Flexible Line Key ....................................................................................... 3-76
Flexible Numbering Plan ........................................................................... 3-77
Flexible Ringing Assignment ..................................................................... 3-78
Flexible Timeout ........................................................................................ 3-79
Full Handsfree Operation .......................................................................... 3-82
Handset Microphone Control ..................................................................... 3-84
Handsfree Answerback ............................................................................. 3-85
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring ............................................................. 3-86
Headset Connection .................................................................................. 3-87
Holdfree Transfer....................................................................................... 3-89
Hold with Recall (Exclusive and Non-Exclusive) ....................................... 3-90
Howler Tone Service ................................................................................. 3-93
Icon Display ............................................................................................... 3-94
I-Hold Indication......................................................................................... 3-95
Incoming Call Identification........................................................................ 3-96
Internal Recall............................................................................................ 3-98
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling.................................................................... 3-99
I-Use Indication........................................................................................ 3-101
Key Function/Multifunction Registration .................................................. 3-102
Manual Line Seizure ................................................................................ 3-103
Manual Pause.......................................................................................... 3-104
Message Waiting Indication for Voice Mail .............................................. 3-105
Microphone Control ................................................................................. 3-106
Music on Hold .......................................................................................... 3-107
System Manual
v
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Nesting Dial ............................................................................................. 3-108
Night Mode .............................................................................................. 3-111
Off-Hook Ringing ..................................................................................... 3-114
One-Touch/Feature Access Keys User Programmable........................ 3-115
PC Programming ..................................................................................... 3-119
Power Failure Transfer ............................................................................ 3-121
Preset Dialing .......................................................................................... 3-122
Prime Line Assignment ............................................................................ 3-123
Privacy on all Calls .................................................................................. 3-125
Programmable Pause for Speed Dial ...................................................... 3-127
Programming from Multiline Telephone ................................................... 3-128
Resident System Program ....................................................................... 3-129
Ringing Line Preference .......................................................................... 3-130
Room Monitor Telephone ........................................................................ 3-131
Seized Trunk Name/Number Display ...................................................... 3-133
Single Line Telephone Access ................................................................ 3-135
Single Line Telephone Adapter ............................................................... 3-138
Softkeys ................................................................................................... 3-140
SPD (InfoSet) or Redial (Electra Elite) Key ............................................. 3-144
Specified CO/PBX Line Seizure .............................................................. 3-146
Speed Dial Extension ........................................................................... 3-147
Speed Dial System ............................................................................... 3-151
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ............................................ 3-154
Step Call .................................................................................................. 3-156
Stored Hookflash ..................................................................................... 3-157
System Set Button ................................................................................... 3-159
Telephone Volume Control ...................................................................... 3-160
Tenant Service......................................................................................... 3-162
Timed Alarm ............................................................................................ 3-164
Tone Override .......................................................................................... 3-166
vi
Table of Contents
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Trunk Outgoing Restriction ...................................................................... 3-168
Trunk Queuing ......................................................................................... 3-169
Two-Color LEDs (Lamp) .......................................................................... 3-171
User Programming .................................................................................. 3-172
Chapter 4 Telephones
Section 1
Introduction ..................................................................................... 4-1
1.1
InfoSet 408 Telephones ...............................................................4-1
1.2
Electra Elite Telephones ..............................................................4-2
Section 2
Wall Mounting Telephones ............................................................. 4-6
2.1
Wall Mounting the InfoSet Telephones ........................................4-6
2.2
Wall Mounting the Electra Elite Telephones ..............................4-10
2.2.1
Wall Mounting using the Base Unit ................................. 4-10
2.2.2
Installing the Wall Mount Unit and Mounting the
Telephone using the WMU-U Unit .................................. 4-16
2.3
Wall Mounting Single Line Telephones .....................................4-20
Section 3
Adjusting the Height of Telephones ............................................ 4-23
3.1
Adjusting the Height of InfoSet Telephones ..............................4-23
3.2
Adjusting the Height of the Electra Elite Telephones .................4-24
3.3
Adjusting the LCD on the Electra Elite Display Telephones ......4-26
Section 4
Installing Line Card Labels and Protective Plastic Panels
on Telephones ............................................................................... 4-27
4.1
Installing the Line Card Labels and Protective Plastic
Panel on the InfoSet Telephones ..............................................4-27
4.2
Installing the Line Card Labels and Protective Plastic
Panel on the Electra Elite Telephones .......................................4-29
4.3
SLT(1)-U10 ADP (Single Line Telephone Adapter) ...................4-30
4.3.1
Connecting the SLT(1)-U10 ADP to the System ............. 4-30
4.3.2
Wall Mounting the SLT(1)-U10 ADP ............................... 4-32
System Manual
vii
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Section 5
Wall Mounting Template for InfoSet Telephones ....................... 4-33
Chapter 5 Optional Equipment
Section 1
General Information ........................................................................ 5-1
Section 2
Preparing the Telephone for Adapter Installation ........................ 5-1
Section 3
Installing Adapters .......................................................................... 5-5
3.1
ACA-U Unit (AC Adapter) ........................................................... 5-5
3.1.1
Connecting the ACA-U Unit ...............................................5-5
3.2
ADA-U Unit (Ancillary Device Adapter) ...................................... 5-6
3.2.1
Connecting Cables to the ADA-U Unit ..............................5-6
3.2.2
Switch Settings ................................................................5-10
3.2.3
Installing an ADA-U Unit on an Electra
Elite Telephone ...............................................................5-11
3.3
APR-U Unit (Analog Port Ringer) ............................................. 5-12
3.3.1
Installing an APR-U Unit on a Telephone ........................5-13
3.3.2
Switch Settings ................................................................5-14
3.3.3
Connecting Cables on the APR-U Unit ...........................5-15
3.4
HFU-U (BK)/(WH) Unit (Handsfree Unit) ................................... 5-16
3.4.1
Installing an HFU-U (BK)/(WH) Unit on a Telephone ......5-16
3.4.2
Installing the External Microphone ..................................5-16
3.4.3
Switch Settings ................................................................5-17
3.5
CTA-U Unit (Computer Telephony Application) ........................ 5-18
3.5.1
Installing the CTA-U Unit .................................................5-19
3.5.2
Connecting the Cables on the CTA-U Unit ......................5-20
3.5.3
Installing the Driver on the PC .........................................5-20
viii
Table of Contents
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Chapter 6 Telephone Programming
Section 1
Introduction ..................................................................................... 6-1
Section 2
Entering Programming Mode ......................................................... 6-1
2.1
Programming Guidelines .............................................................6-2
Section 3
Programming Functions ................................................................. 6-4
Chapter 7 PC Programming
Section 1
Introduction ..................................................................................... 7-1
Section 2
Hardware and Software Requirements ......................................... 7-1
Section 3
Installing PC Programming Software ............................................ 7-2
Section 4
Starting PC Programming .............................................................. 7-2
Section 5
Using PC Programming .................................................................. 7-3
Section 6
Infoset 408 Programming Menus .................................................. 7-5
6.1
Main Menu Screen .......................................................................7-5
6.2
Switch Menu ................................................................................7-6
6.3
Phones .........................................................................................7-8
6.3.1
Line Keys .......................................................................... 7-9
6.3.2
One-Touch Keys ............................................................. 7-11
6.3.3
Speed Dialing .................................................................. 7-13
6.4
Ringing .......................................................................................7-16
6.5
Restricted Dialing .......................................................................7-18
6.6
New File .....................................................................................7-21
6.7
Load File ....................................................................................7-23
6.8
Save File ....................................................................................7-24
6.9
Copy ..........................................................................................7-26
6.10
D.E.S.I. ......................................................................................7-28
System Manual
ix
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
6.11
Report ........................................................................................ 7-30
6.11.1
System Report .................................................................7-31
6.11.2
Telephone-Based Report ................................................7-33
6.11.3
Trunk-Based Report ........................................................7-35
6.11.4
Non-Default Value Report ...............................................7-37
6.12
Help ........................................................................................... 7-38
6.13
Connect ..................................................................................... 7-40
6.14
Upload ....................................................................................... 7-41
6.15
Download ................................................................................... 7-42
6.16
Disconnect ................................................................................. 7-43
6.17
Expert ........................................................................................ 7-44
6.18
Wizard ....................................................................................... 7-46
Appendix A Feature Access Codes and Special Numbers Lists
Appendix B Tone Patterns
Appendix C Glossary of Terms
x
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure 1-1
Connecting the ESI to the Multiline Telephone Using Twisted
2-Pair Cable ................................................................................................. 1-7
Figure 2-1
Removing the Front Cover ........................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2
Attaching the Backup Battery Connectors .................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-3
Installing the Lithium Battery ........................................................................ 2-3
Figure 2-4
Setting the Battery Memory Switch .............................................................. 2-4
Figure 2-5
Securing the KSU to the Wall ....................................................................... 2-5
Figure 2-6
Connecting the Trunk Lines and Telephones to the System ........................ 2-6
Figure 2-7
Removing the Plastic Knockout .................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-8
Attaching the Speaker Relay Cables ............................................................ 2-8
Figure 2-9
Inserting the Connector into the Terminal .................................................... 2-9
Figure 2-10
Inserting the Telephone Cord into the Jack .................................................. 2-9
Figure 2-11
Installing the ESI ETU into the KSU ........................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-12
Connecting the Telephones to the KSU ..................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-13
Installing the COI ETU into the KSU ........................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-14
Removing the ISDN Knockout .................................................................... 2-13
Figure 2-15
Inserting the Cable into the ISDN Slot ........................................................ 2-13
Figure 2-16
Inserting the Cable into the COI ETU ......................................................... 2-13
Figure 2-17
Connecting Additional Lines to the KSU .................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-18
Connecting Optional Devices to the COI ETU ............................................ 2-14
Figure 2-19
Installing the First CID Unit ......................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-20
Installing the Second CID Unit ................................................................... 2-16
Figure 2-21
Piggybacking the COI(2) ETU and CID Unit ............................................... 2-16
System Manual
xi
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Figure 2-22
Inserting the COI ETU into the KSU ...........................................................2-17
Figure 2-23
Installing the SLI ETU ................................................................................. 2-18
Figure 2-24
Removing the Plastic Knockout for the SLT ............................................... 2-19
Figure 2-25
Attaching the RJ-11 Cables ........................................................................ 2-20
Figure 2-26
Installing the PBR ETU on the KSU ............................................................ 2-21
Figure 2-27
Installing the DB-9 Connector Plate ............................................................ 2-22
Figure 2-28
Attaching the Grounding Wire ..................................................................... 2-23
Figure 2-29
Installing the MIF ETU on the KSU ............................................................. 2-23
Figure 2-30
Plugging the DB-9 Cable into the DB-9 Connector ..................................... 2-24
Figure 2-31
Installing the DPH ETU into the KSU ..........................................................2-25
Figure 2-32
Removing the Plastic Knockout for DPH and DPR ..................................... 2-26
Figure 2-33
Connecting Doorphones .............................................................................2-26
Figure 2-34
Wrapping the Connector Cables ................................................................. 2-27
Figure 2-35
Attaching RJ-11 Cords to the DPH and DPR Connectors .......................... 2-28
Figure 2-36
RCA Jacks for Music and Paging ............................................................... 2-29
Figure 2-37
Connecting InfoSet Telephone Cords ......................................................... 2-30
Figure 2-38
Connecting Electra Elite Telephone Cords .................................................2-31
Figure 2-39
Leading Line Cords on the Electra Elite Telephone ................................... 2-31
Figure 2-40
Dterm Cordless Lite Telephone .................................................................. 2-32
Figure 2-41
Connecting the Base Unit of the DTU-4R-1 (BK) TEL ................................ 2-34
Figure 2-42
Connecting and Supplying Power to the Base Unit on the
ETW-4R-1 (BK) TEL ................................................................................... 2-36
Figure 2-43
Inserting New Batteries into the KSU ......................................................... 2-37
Figure 2-44
Attaching the Battery Connectors ............................................................... 2-38
Figure 2-45
Replacing the Lithium Battery ..................................................................... 2-39
Figure 2-46
Replacing the Fuse ..................................................................................... 2-41
xii
Table of Contents
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Figure 4-1
InfoSet 408 Telephones ............................................................................... 4-1
Figure 4-2
Electra Elite Telephones .............................................................................. 4-3
Figure 4-3
Single Line Telephones ................................................................................ 4-5
Figure 4-4
Removing the Stoppers from the Adjustment Stand .................................... 4-6
Figure 4-5
Attaching the Hanger to the Cradle of the InfoSet Telephone ...................... 4-7
Figure 4-6
Routing the Telephone Cord Inside the Adjustment Stand .......................... 4-8
Figure 4-7
Fastening the Stoppers to the Wall .............................................................. 4-8
Figure 4-8
Hanging the InfoSet Telephone on the Wall ................................................. 4-9
Figure 4-9
Positioning the Handset Hanger on Electra Elite Telephones .................... 4-10
Figure 4-10
Raising the Base Plate on an Electra Elite Telephone ............................... 4-10
Figure 4-11
Unlocking the Tab on an Electra Elite Telephone ...................................... 4-11
Figure 4-12
Releasing the Right Tab on an Electra Elite Telephone ............................. 4-11
Figure 4-13
Removing Bottom Cover on an Electra Elite Telephone ........................... 4-12
Figure 4-14
Removing the Knockout from an Electra Elite Telephone .......................... 4-12
Figure 4-15
Attaching the Base Plate to the Wall .......................................................... 4-13
Figure 4-16
Attaching the Base Plate using a Modular Jack ......................................... 4-13
Figure 4-17
Plugging in the Line Cord using a Wall Jack .............................................. 4-14
Figure 4-18
Plugging in the Line Cord Using a Modular Jack ........................................ 4-14
Figure 4-19
Attaching the Bottom Tabs of the Electra Elite Telephone to the
Base Cover ................................................................................................. 4-15
Figure 4-20
Attaching the Top Tabs of the Electra Elite Telephone to the
Base Plate .................................................................................................. 4-15
Figure 4-21
Installed Wall Mount Unit on an Electra Elite Telephone ............................ 4-16
Figure 4-22
Removing the Tabs from the Adapter ......................................................... 4-17
Figure 4-23
Removing the Tabs from the WMU-U Unit ................................................. 4-18
Figure 4-24
Leading the Line Cord out of the WMU-U Unit ........................................... 4-18
System Manual
xiii
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Figure 4-25
Attaching the WMU-U Unit to the Wall ........................................................ 4-19
Figure 4-26
Attaching the Telephone to the WMU-U Unit .............................................. 4-19
Figure 4-27
Removing the Hook from a Single Line Telephone .................................... 4-20
Figure 4-28
Turning the Hook Over ............................................................................... 4-20
Figure 4-29
Sliding the Hook into Position on a Single Line Telephone ........................ 4-20
Figure 4-30
Removing the Screws from the Base of a Single Line Telephone .............. 4-21
Figure 4-31
Replacing the Plate and Screws in the Base of the
Single Line Telephone ................................................................................ 4-21
Figure 4-32
Protruding Screws ......................................................................................4-22
Figure 4-33
Mounting the Telephone .............................................................................4-22
Figure 4-34
Infoset Telephone Stand .............................................................................4-23
Figure 4-35
Adjusting the Height of the InfoSet Telephone ........................................... 4-23
Figure 4-36
Locating the Adjustment Tabs on the Electra Elite Telephone ................... 4-24
Figure 4-37
Raising the Base Plate on the Electra Elite Telephone ..............................4-24
Figure 4-38
Adjusting the Line Cord Length on the Electra Elite Telephone ................. 4-25
Figure 4-39
Lowering the Base Plate on the Electra Elite Telephone ............................ 4-25
Figure 4-40
Adjusting the LCD on the Electra Elite Telephone ..................................... 4-26
Figure 4-41
Line Card Label for Infoset Telephones ...................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-42
Plastic Panel for InfoSet Telephones ..........................................................4-28
Figure 4-43
Installing the Plastic Cover on the InfoSet Telephone ................................ 4-28
Figure 4-44
Installing Line Card and Plastic Panel on a Telephone ..............................4-29
Figure 4-45
Installing Plastic Panel on a Telephone ...................................................... 4-29
Figure 4-46
Removing the Plastic Panel from the Electra Elite Telephone ................... 4-30
Figure 4-47
Connecting a Single Line Telephone to the System using an
SLT(1)-U10 ADP ......................................................................................... 4-31
Figure 4-48
Connecting the SLT(1)-U10 ADP ............................................................... 4-31
xiv
Table of Contents
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Figure 4-49
Removing the Screws from the SLT(1)-U10 ADP ...................................... 4-32
Figure 4-50
Attaching the SLT(1)-U10 ADP to the Wall ................................................ 4-32
Figure 5-1
Raising the Base Plate on an Electra Elite Telephone ................................. 5-1
Figure 5-2
Unlocking the Tab on an Electra Elite Telephone ........................................ 5-2
Figure 5-3
Releasing the Right Tab on an Electra Elite Telephone ............................... 5-2
Figure 5-4
Removing Bottom Cover on an Electra Elite Telephone ............................. 5-3
Figure 5-5
Removing the Base Plate Dummy End ........................................................ 5-3
Figure 5-6
Cutting the Dummy End in Half .................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-7
Installing the Adapter in Connector 1 ........................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-8
Installing Dummy End B ............................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-9
Connecting the ACA-U Unit .......................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5-10
ADA-U Unit ................................................................................................... 5-7
Figure 5-11
Attaching Cables to the ADA-U Unit ............................................................. 5-7
Figure 5-12
ADA-U Unit Switch Settings ....................................................................... 5-10
Figure 5-13
Attaching the ADA-U Unit to an Electra Elite Telephone ............................ 5-11
Figure 5-14
Leading the Audio Cable out from the ADA-U Unit .................................... 5-12
Figure 5-15
APR-U Unit ................................................................................................. 5-12
Figure 5-16
Attaching the Unit to the Telephone ........................................................... 5-13
Figure 5-17
Leading the Telephone Cord out from the Unit .......................................... 5-13
Figure 5-18
Closing the Base Plate Cover .................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-19
APR-U Unit Switches .................................................................................. 5-14
Figure 5-20
Connecting Cables on the APR-U Unit ....................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-21
HFU-U(BK)/(WH) Unit ................................................................................ 5-16
Figure 5-22
Microphone with Mute ................................................................................ 5-16
Figure 5-23
Attaching a Microphone to a Telephone ..................................................... 5-17
Figure 5-24
HFU-U(BK)/(WH) Unit Switches ................................................................. 5-17
System Manual
xv
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Figure 5-25
Attaching an Electra Elite Telephone to a PC ............................................. 5-18
Figure 5-26
CTA-U Unit ................................................................................................. 5-19
Figure 5-27
Attaching the Unit to the Telephone ...........................................................5-19
Figure 5-28
Connecting the RS-232C Cable to the CTA-U Unit on the Telephone ....... 5-20
Figure 7-1
Navigational Bars for Internet Browsers ....................................................... 7-3
Figure 7-2
Main Menu .................................................................................................... 7-5
Figure 7-3
Switch Screen ............................................................................................... 7-6
Figure 7-4
Phones Screen ............................................................................................. 7-8
Figure 7-5
Line Key Screen ........................................................................................... 7-9
Figure 7-6
One-Touch/Feature Access Keys ............................................................... 7-11
Figure 7-7
Station Speed Dials .................................................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-8
System Speed Dials ................................................................................... 7-14
Figure 7-9
Ringing Screen ........................................................................................... 7-16
Figure 7-10
Restricted Dialing Screen ........................................................................... 7-18
Figure 7-11
Quick Setup of Dialing Restrictions ............................................................ 7-19
Figure 7-12
File New Screen ......................................................................................... 7-21
Figure 7-13
File Load Screen ......................................................................................... 7-23
Figure 7-14
File Save Screen ........................................................................................ 7-24
Figure 7-15
Copy Screen ...............................................................................................7-26
Figure 7-16
D.E.S.I. Screen ........................................................................................... 7-28
Figure 7-17
D.E.S.I. Label Screen ................................................................................. 7-29
Figure 7-18
Select Report Type Screen ......................................................................... 7-30
Figure 7-19
System Report Configuration Screen ......................................................... 7-31
Figure 7-20
System Report Sample ............................................................................... 7-32
Figure 7-21
Telephone-Based Report Configuration Screen ......................................... 7-33
Figure 7-22
Telephone-Based Report Sample .............................................................. 7-34
xvi
Table of Contents
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Figure 7-23
Trunk-Based Report Screen ....................................................................... 7-35
Figure 7-24
Trunk-Based Report Sample ...................................................................... 7-36
Figure 7-25
Non-Default Value Report .......................................................................... 7-37
Figure 7-26
Help Screen ................................................................................................ 7-38
Figure 7-27
Help Example ............................................................................................. 7-39
Figure 7-28
Connect Screen .......................................................................................... 7-40
Figure 7-29
Upload Screen ............................................................................................ 7-41
Figure 7-30
Download Screen ....................................................................................... 7-42
Figure 7-31
Disconnect Screen ..................................................................................... 7-43
Figure 7-32
Expert Screen ............................................................................................. 7-44
Figure 7-33
Wizard Index Screen .................................................................................. 7-46
Figure 7-34
Wizard Feature List Screen ........................................................................ 7-47
Figure 7-35
Wizard Feature Programming Screen ........................................................ 7-48
System Manual
xvii
List of Tables
Table 1-1
Equipment List ................................................................................................ 1-1
Table 1-2
Power Consumption ....................................................................................... 1-6
Table 1-3
Multiline Telephone Loop Resistance and Cable Length ............................... 1-6
Table 1-4
Cable Connection Between the Analog Port Adapter and the
Single Line Telephone .................................................................................... 1-7
Table 1-5
Weights and Dimensions ................................................................................ 1-8
Table 3-1
InfoSet and Electra Elite Telephone Keys ...................................................... 3-1
Table 3-2
Dial Pad Keys Used When Entering Names ................................................ 3-45
Table 3-3
Flexible Timeouts ......................................................................................... 3-79
Table 3-4
Speed Dial Search Keys ............................................................................. 3-141
Table 5-1
ADA-U Cable Connections ............................................................................. 5-8
Table 5-2
ADA-U Unit Switch Settings ......................................................................... 5-10
Table 5-3
APR-U Unit Switch Settings for SW1 and SW3 ............................................ 5-15
Table 5-4
HFU-U Unit Switch Settings ......................................................................... 5-18
Table 6-1
Navigational Keys for Telephone Programming ............................................. 6-3
Table 6-2
Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart ............................................ 6-5
Table 7-1
Quick Guide to InfoSet Programming Menus ................................................. 7-4
Table A-1
Feature Access Codes List for Multiline Telephones .....................................A-1
Table A-2
Feature Access Codes List for Single Line Telephones .................................A-4
Table A-3
Special Internal Dial Numbers List .................................................................A-4
Table C-1
Glossary of Terms ......................................................................................... C-1
System Manual
xix
System Overview
SECTION 1
YOUR SYSTEM
Your InfoSet 408 key service unit (KSU) provides you a complete communications
system to enhance your business. The InfoSet 408 provides for a maximum of four
lines and eight telephones. This system is easy to install, operate, and maintain and
provides you the benefits and many of the features of a larger key telephone system.
You can easily install your system and using the system defaults have your system
operational in a very short time. Should you need to customize your system you can
make changes using PC Programming or Telephone Programming. PC
Programming is an easy-to-use Windows 95/98 PC based software program.
Telephone Programming allows you to make changes using an InfoSet or Elite
telephone.
Your system provides battery backup in case of a power outage. System
programming and speed dialing is retained for a minimum of 2 years, if your CPU
lithium battery is fully charged. The built-in batteries located in key service unit allow
your telephones to continue operating for approximately 30 minutes in the event of a
power outage.
S
ECTION 2
EQUIPMENT
The following table lists the equipment that is available with your system. The System
Maximum column indicates the maximum number of pieces of hardware that can be
installed for each system.
Table 1-1 Equipment List
Equipment Name
Description
System Maximum
Key Service Units, Power Supply Units, and Adapters
The Basic Key Service Unit (KSU) for the InfoSet system provides
service for outside lines and interconnection of the telephones. The
basic KSU provides up to two trunk lines and five telephones.
B408-B10 KSU
N/A
The B408-B10 KSU has a dedicated ESI slot, SLI or VMS slot, DPH
slot, PBR slot, and MIF slot. The B408-B10 KSU also provides a
COI/BRT shared slot.
System Manual
1 - 1
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Equipment Name
Description
System Maximum
Common Electronic Telephone Units
This unit provides additional memory for processing and backup for
MIF-B10 ETU
1 per system
PC programming and SMDR.
Interface Electronic Telephone Units
This Basic Rate Interface unit supports one circuit (two voice
1 ETU
BRT(1)-B10 ETU
channels) for ISDN Basic Rate Interface.
(2B)
This ETU is installed in the BRT/COI slot.
The Caller ID Unit detects Caller ID signals from the central office
and sends caller identification to the main board. This information
CID(2)-B10 UNIT
is then displayed on the LCD of the telephones.
2 Units
This ETU is installed on the main board and COI(2)-B10 ETU as a
piggyback.
Electrical fuses (posistors) are built into this ETU. This unit
supports two outside (CO/PBX) lines and provides circuitry for ring
detection, holding, and dialing.
1 ETU
COI(2)-B10 ETU
The outside lines must be Loop Start DTMF trunks.
2 CO/PBX lines
This ETU is installed in the BRT/COI slot.
The Electronic Station Interface ETU contains three circuits. Each
circuit can support any type of multiline telephone, or single line
1 ETU
ESI(3)-B10 ETU
telephone adapter.
This ETU is installed in slot ESI in the B408-B10 KSU. A
3 Extensions
five-channel ESI circuit is built in on the B408-B10 KSU.
The Single Line Interface ETU supports a maximum of two single
line telephones. This ETU provides Ringing Signal Generator
1 ETU
SLI(2)-B10 ETU
(RSG) to single line telephones.
2 ports
This ETU is installed in the VMS/SLI slot in the B408-B10 KSU.
Optional Electronic Telephone Units
The doorphone interface ETU allows two DP-D-1A doorphones to
be connected. One call is allowed, and two door lock release
DPH-B10 ETU
relays are provided. This card provides two PBR circuits.
1 ETU
This ETU is installed in the DPH slot in the B408-B10 KSU.
The Push Button Receiver ETU detects and translates DTMF tones
generated by single line telephones, modems, or facsimile
PBR-B10 ETU
machines.
1 ETU
This ETU is installed in the PBR slot in the B408-B10 KSU.
This ETU provides two digital channels of built-in voice mail.
VMS(2)-B10 ETU
1 ETU
This ETU is installed in the VMS/SLI slot.
1 - 2
System Overview
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Equipment Name
Description
System Maximum
InfoSet Telephones
This digital multiline telephone has eight line keys (unused line keys
DTB-16-1 (BK)/(WH) can be programmed for one-touch key operation), eight
7
TEL
programmable one-touch keys, a built-in speakerphone, a large
LED to indicate incoming calls and messages.
This digital multiline telephone is equipped with eight line keys
(unused line keys can be programmed for one-touch key
operation), eight programmable one-touch keys, a built-in
DTB-16D-1 (BK)/
speakerphone, a large LED to indicate incoming calls and
8
(WH) TEL
messages.
This telephone also has a 32-character, 2-line Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD).
Electra Elite Telephones
DP-D-1A
This doorphone may be used when DPH-B10 ETU is installed.
2
This single line telephone is a fully modular telephone with a flash
9
key, redial key, three-level receive volume control, two-level ring
(Maximum capacity uses
DTP-1-1 (WH) TEL
volume control, data jack, and message waiting lamp.
two ports from the SLI and
seven ports using SLT
Each telephone connects to an SLI(2)-B10 ETU or SLT(1)-U10
adapters)
ADP.
This single line telephone is a fully modular telephone with a flash
key, REDIAL key, three-level receive volume control, two-level ring
9
DTP-1HM-1 (WH)
volume control, data jack, message waiting lamp, and eight
(Maximum capacity uses
two ports from the SLI and
TEL
programmable One-Touch/Speed Dial keys.
seven ports using SLT
Each telephone connects to an SLI(2)-B10 ETU or SLT(1)-U10
adapters)
ADP.
This telephone is a fully modular instrument with two line keys
(each line key is equipped with a two-color LED; unused line keys
DTP-2DT-1 (WH)
can be programmed for one-touch key operation), eight function
7
TEL
keys, built-in speakerphone, and a large LED to indicate incoming
calls and messages.
This Dterm Cordless Lite telephone can be connected to the InfoSet
system using an ESI port. The telephone has a cordless handset, a
16-digit, 2-line LCD, dial pad, TALK key, HOLD key, TRF key, CNF
key, MUTE key, a MSG LED, buzzer, and four function keys with
DTU-4R-1 (BK) TEL
red LEDs.
8
When connected to a multiline telephone, this Dterm Cordless Lite
telephone can be switched to the multiline telephone connected to
it by pressing the DESK key on the base unit of the idle Dterm
Cordless Lite Telephone.
System Manual
1 - 3
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Equipment Name
Description
System Maximum
This Dterm Cordless telephone can be connected to the system
using an ESI port. The telephone has a cordless handset, a
10-digit, 2-line, LCD, dial pad, TALK key, HOLD key, TRF key, CNF
key, SPD key, a MSG LED, optional buzzer and four function keys
ETW-4R-1(BK) TEL
with red LEDs.
8
The Dterm Cordless telephone can be switched to an Electra Elite
telephone, which is connected to it, by pressing the DESK key on
the base unit of the idle Dterm Cordless telephone.
This digital multiline telephone has eight line keys (each line key is
equipped with a two-color LED; unused line keys can be
DTU-8-1 (BK)/(WH)
programmed for one-touch key operation), built-in speakerphone, a
7
TEL
Large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages, headset jack,
and compatibility with ADA-U, APR-U, and HFU-U Units.
This digital multiline telephone has eight line keys (each line key is
equipped with a two-color LED; unused line keys can be
programmed for one-touch key operation) built-in speakerphone, a
Large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages, headset jack,
DTU-8D-2 (BK)/
and compatibility with ADA-U, APR-U, and HFU-U Units.
8
(WH) TEL
This telephone is also equipped with a 24-character, 3-line,
adjustable Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
The DTU-8D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL provides four softkeys.
This digital multiline telephone has 16 programmable line keys
DTU-16-1 (BK)/(WH) (each with a two-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, a Large LED
7
TEL
to indicate incoming calls and messages, headset jack, and
compatibility with ADA-U, APR-U, and HFU-U Units.
This digital multiline telephone has 16 programmable line keys
(each with a two-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, a Large LED
to indicate incoming calls and messages, headset jack, and
DTU-16D-2 (BK)/
compatibility with ADA-U, APR-U, and HFU-U Units.
8
(WH) TEL
This telephone also has a 24-character, 3-line, adjustable Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD).
The DTU-16D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL provides four softkeys.
This digital multiline telephone has 32 programmable line keys
DTU-32-1 (BK)/(WH) (each with a two-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, a Large LED
7
TEL
to indicate incoming calls and messages, headset jack, and
compatibility with ADA-U, APR-U, and HFU-U Units.
This digital multiline telephone is equipped with 32 programmable
line keys (each with a two-color LED), a built-in speakerphone, a
Large LED to indicate incoming calls and messages, headset jack,
DTU-32D-2 (BK)/
and compatibility with ADA-U, APR-U, and HFU-U Units.
8
(WH) TEL
This telephone has a 24-character, 3-line, adjustable Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD).
The DTU-32D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL provides four softkeys.
1 - 4
System Overview
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Equipment Name
Description
System Maximum
Adapters and Optional Units
The AC Adapter unit connects to one of the following: APR-U Unit,
One per Multiline
ACA-U Unit
or HFU-U Unit.
Telephone as required
This Ancillary Device adapter provides the digital multiline
telephone with connection for a tape recorder.
ADA-U Unit
8
This adapter can be installed on any Electra Elite multiline
telephone.
When this Analog Port Ringer adapter is used, an additional single
line telephone or a modem can be connected to an Electra Elite
APR-U Unit
multiline telephone.
8
This adapter can be installed on any Electra Elite multiline
telephone.
This optional Handsfree Unit provides full-duplex handsfree
communication. This unit comes with the handsfree adapter and
HFU-U (BK)/(WH)
an external microphone.
8
Unit
This adapter can be installed on any Electra Elite multiline
telephone.
This Adapter provides an interface for single line telephones and
SLT(1)-U10 ADP
other similar devices from an ESI ETU channel.
7
This adapter is connected to any ESI port.
S
ECTION 3
POWER REQUIREMENTS
The InfoSet 408 KSU has eight dedicated slots, one each for BRT/COI, ESI, VMS/
SLI, PBR, DPH, MIF, and DSL ETUs.
3.1
Power Supply Inputs
The AC input requirements for the InfoSet 408 system are listed below.
AC Input
117 Vac ± 10%
60 Hz ± 10%
Single Phase
12A circuit
A dedicated outlet, separately fused and grounded, is required.
System Manual
1 - 5
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
3.2
Power Supply Consumption
The power consumption for the InfoSet 408 system is listed in Table 1-2
Power Consumption.
Table 1-2 Power Consumption
Maximum
Watts Used
Watts Used
KSU
RMS
(Idle)
(Maximum)
Current
B408-B10 KSU
2.5 A
120
230
S
ECTION 4
CABLING REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
This section provides cabling requirements and specifications for various equipment
used in the InfoSet 408 system.
BRT(1)-B10 ETU
COI(2)-B10 ETU
DPH-B10 ETU
ESI(3)-B10 ETU
SLI(2)-B10 ETU
The KSU is connected with each of the Multiline Telephones and Single Line
Telephones by a separate twisted 1-pair cable or 2-pair cable (only for Multiline
Telephones). (Refer to Table 1-3 Multiline Telephone Loop Resistance and Cable
Length for the loop resistance and cabling requirements for Multiline Telephones and
adapters.)
Table 1-3 Multiline Telephone Loop Resistance and Cable Length
Maximum Feet by Maximum Feet by
Maximum
Twisted 1-Pair
Twisted 2-Pair
Loop
Terminal or Adapter
Cable
Cable
Resistance
(Ohms)
24 AWG
24 AWG
DTB-16-1 TEL
26
450
900
DTB-16D-1 TEL
26
450
900
DP-D-1A
20
N/A
N/A
DTP-1-1 (WH) TEL
600
N/A
N/A
DTP-1HM-1 (WH) TEL
600
N/A
N/A
DTP-2DT-1(WH) TEL
35
600
1000
DTU 4R-1(BK) TEL
N/A
650
1000
DTU-8-1(BK)/(WH) TEL
35
600
1000
DTU-8D-2(BK)/(WH) TEL
35
600
1000
DTU-16-1(BK)/(WH) TEL
26
450
900
1 - 6
System Overview
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 1-3 Multiline Telephone Loop Resistance and Cable Length (Continued)
Maximum Feet by Maximum Feet by
Maximum
Twisted 1-Pair
Twisted 2-Pair
Loop
Terminal or Adapter
Cable
Cable
Resistance
(Ohms)
24 AWG
24 AWG
DTU-16D-2(BK)/(WH) TEL
26
450
900
DTU-32-1(BK)/(WH) TEL
21
360
720
DTU-32D-2(BK)/(WH) TEL
21
360
720
ETW-4R-1 (BK) TEL
N/A
650
650
SLT(1)-U10 ADP
35
600
1000
The length for the specified SLT Adapter is the length between the SLT Adapter and
the ESI port.
The loop resistance for the DTP-1-1 (WH) TEL and the DTP-1HM-1 (WH) TEL includes
the resistance of the single line telephone.
The loop resistance for the DP-D-1A does not include the resistance of the DP-D-1A
telephone.
Tw isted 2-P air Cable
ESI
M ultiline Telephone
Figure 1-1 Connecting the ESI to the Multiline Telephone Using Twisted 2-Pair
Cable
Table 1-4 Cable Connection Between the Analog Port Adapter and the Single Line
Telephone
Maximum Loop
Maximum Feet by
Resistance from
Twisted 1-Pair
Connected Equipment
Cable
Connected
Cable
Equipment to
(24 AWG)
Telephone
APR-U
Twisted Pair
5.4 Ohms
50 Feet
SLT(1)-U10 ADP
Mixing digital and analog ports through the same 25-pair cable runs is not recommended.
System Manual
1 - 7
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
S
ECTION 5
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
5.1
Temperature
Operating: +32°F ~ +104°F (0°C ~ 40°C)
Recommended Long Term: +50°F ~ +90°F (10°C ~ 32.2°C)
5.2
Humidity
Operating: 10% ~ 90% noncondensing
S
ECTION 6
WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
Table 1-5 Weights and Dimensions shows shipping weight, height, width, and depth
for the InfoSet 408 KSU, optional ETUs, telephones and adapters.
Table 1-5 Weights and Dimensions
Shipping
Unit
Height
Width
Depth
Weight*
22.5 oz
3.4"
4.2"
5.2"
ACA-U Unit
(638 g)
(86 mm)
(107 mm)
(133 mm)
2.3 oz
1.1"
2.3"
3.9"
ADA-U Unit
(65 g)
(29 mm)
(59 mm)
(99 mm)
4.3 oz
2.6"
2.3"
4.8"
APR-U Unit
(122 g)
(66 mm)
(59 mm)
(121 mm)
14.33 lbs
12.63"
15.19"
4.88"
B408-B10 KSU
(6.5 kg)
(320 mm)
(385 mm)
(124 mm)
4.59"
3.69"
5.44"
.82"
BRT(1)-B10 ETU
(130 g)
(93 mm)
(138 mm)
(21 mm)
6.53 oz
3.69"
5.44"
1.13"
COI(2)-B10 ETU
(185 g)
(93 mm)
(138 mm)
(29 mm)
3.36 oz
2.38"
4.31"
1.13"
CID(2)-B10 UNIT
(98 g)
(60 mm)
(110 mm)
(28 mm)
4.94 oz
3.69"
5.44"
.82"
DPH-B10 ETU
(140 g)
(93 mm)
(138 mm)
(21 mm)
15.4 oz
2.25"
4.25"
7.5"
DTU-4R-1 TEL
(437 g)
(57 mm)
(108)
(191)
41.0 oz
4.8"
7.8"
9.3"
DTU-8-1(BK)/(WH) TEL
(1163 g)
(123 mm)
(197 mm)
(235 mm)
43.5 oz
4.8"
7.8"
9.3"
DTU-8D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL
(1233 g)
(123 mm)
(197 mm)
(235 mm)
41 oz
4.8"
7.8"
9.3"
DTU-16-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
(1162 g)
(123 mm)
(197 mm)
(235 mm)
43.5 oz
4.8"
7.8"
9.3"
DTU-16D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL
(1233 g)
(123 mm)
(197 mm)
(235 mm)
1 - 8
System Overview
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Shipping
Unit
Height
Width
Depth
Weight*
46 oz
4.8"
8.7"
9.3"
DTU-32-1( ) (BK)/(WH) TEL
(1304 g)
(123 mm)
(220 mm)
(235 mm)
48 oz
4.8"
8.7"
9.3"
DTU-32D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL
(1361 g)
(123 mm)
(220 mm)
(235 mm)
26.8 oz
2.36"
6.22"
8.81"
DTP-1-1 (WH) TEL
(760 g)
(60 mm)
(158 mm)
(224 mm)
26.8 oz
2.36"
6.22"
8.81"
DTP-1HM-1 (WH) TEL
(760 g)
(60 mm)
(158 mm)
(224 mm)
41 oz
4.8"
7.8"
9.3"
DTP-2DT-1 (WH) TEL
(1163 g)
(123 mm)
( 197mm
(235 mm)
26 oz
3.42"
5.51"
7.48"
ETW-4R-1 (BK) TEL
(737 g)
(87 mm)
(140 mm)
(190 mm)
4.59 oz
3.69"
5.44"
.81"
ESI(3)-B10 ETU
(130 mm)
(93 mm)
(138 mm)
(20 mm)
38.8 oz
9.13"
6.63"
3.38"
DTB-16-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
(1100 g)
(231 mm)
(168 mm)
(86 mm)
40.46 oz
9.13"
6.63"
3.38"
DTB-16D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
(1180 g)
(231 mm)
(168 mm)
(86 mm)
7.1 oz
3.4"
4.2"
5.2"
HFU-U (BK)/(WH) Unit
(201 g)
(86 mm)
(107 mm)
(133 mm)
11.66 oz
3.69"
5.44"
.82"
MIF-B10 ETU
(340 g)
(93 mm)
(138 mm)
(21 mm)
3.60 oz
3.69"
5.44"
.82"
PBR-B10 ETU
(102 g)
(93 mm)
(138 mm)
(21 mm)
6 oz
3.69"
5.44"
.94"
SLI(2)-B10 ETU
(170 g)
(93 mm)
(138 mm)
(24 mm)
9 oz.
1.8"
2.8"
4.8"
SLT(1)-U10 ADP
(255 g)
(45 mm)
(70 mm)
(120 mm)
32 oz.
5"
10"
8.5"
VMS(2)-B10 ETU
(907 g)
(127 mm)
(254 mm)
(216 mm)
10.6 oz
4.1"
5.9"
7.1"
WMU-U Unit
(301 g)
(104 mm)
(151 mm)
(180 mm)
* Shipping weight includes the shipping carton.
Weights and dimensions have been rounded to the nearest decimal.
S
ECTION 7
OUTSIDE LINE TYPE
The following outside line types can be used with the InfoSet 408 system.
2-wire, Loop Start Trunks
ISDN-BRI Trunks (2B)
System Manual
1 - 9
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
S
ECTION 8
NETWORK AND CONTROL
8.1
Transmission, Network, and Control Specifications
8.1.1
Transmission
Data Length
From Multiline Telephone to ESI(3)-B10 ETU: 23 bits
From ESI(3)-B10 ETU to Multiline Telephone: 23 bits
Data Transmission Rates:
Between ESI(3)-B10 ETU and Multiline Telephone: 184K
bps (voice and signaling)
Scanning Time for each Multiline Telephone: 32 ms.
8.1.2
Network
Time Division Multiplexing allows transmission of a number of
separate data, voice and/or video simultaneously over one
communications medium. The information below indicates the
specifications the InfoSet 408 system uses for switching, clock,
data bus, timeframe.
TDM Switching:
PCM (µ Law)
TDM Clock:
2.048 MHz
TDM Data Bus:
8 bit
TDM Timeframe: 125 µs.
8.1.3
Control
This section indicates the speed and capacities of the control.
Control: Stored program with distributed processing
Central Processor: 8-bit microprocessor
Clock: 12.288 MHz
Sub-processor: 8-bit microprocessor
Multiline Telephone: 8-bit microprocessor
SLT Adapter: 4-bit microprocessor
8.1.4
Telephone
The voltage, current, ring signal information for the InfoSet 408
multiline telephones, single line telephone equipment, and APR
units are listed below.
1 - 10
System Overview
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Multiline Telephone
Voltage: -11 ~ -26 Vdc
Maximum Current: 250 mA
Acoustical characteristics meet Electronic Industry
Association (EIA) standard proposal SP-1286 and
standard EIA RS-470.
Single Line Telephone
Standard 2500 Set: 500 type network
Nominal Current: 35 mA
Ring Signal: 56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz
SLT(1)-U10 ADP
Standard 2500 Set: 500 type network
Nominal Current: 30 mA
Ring Signal: 56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz
APR-U Unit
Standard 2500 Set: 500 type network
Nominal Current: 30 mA
Ring Signal: 70 Vac RMS @ 18 Hz
S
ECTION 9
EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
9.1
Music Sources for Music on Hold via KSU
Auxiliary Input: 0.6V PPS Signal Level
Input Impedance: 600
9.2
External Paging (Audio) via KSU
Output Power: 10 dBm Signal Level
Output Impedance: 600
System Manual
1 - 11
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
9.3
External Tone Ringer
Output Level: 10 dBm
Output Impedance: 600
Relay Contact Rating: 1A, 24 Vdc
9.4
SMDR Output
Male Connector (System Output) Standard RS-232C (DB-9)
9.5
PC Connection
Male Connector (System Output) Standard RS-232C (DB-9)
9.6
Relay Contact
All Relay Contact Ratings: 1A, 24Vdc
SECTION 10
BATTERY BACKUP
The InfoSet 408 system has battery backup functions for system backup and for
memory backup.
10.1
System Backup
During a power failure, the system is backed up using a rechargeable
battery. This battery backup supports all system operations for
approximately 30 minutes.
10.2
Memory Backup
The B408-B10 KSU has a lithium battery installed to provide backup of
system memory. The system memory (programmed data) is retained for a
minimum of two years.
1 - 12
System Overview
Installation
SECTION 1
BASIC INSTALLATION
This section provides instructions for the basic installation of the system. Before
the system is operational the backup battery must be attached, the lithium battery
that retains system memory must be installed, the memory backup switch must be
moved to the "Hold" position, and the system must be wall mounted.
There are two standard configuration which can be expanded to a maximum of
four trunk lines (ports) and eight telephones by purchasing the necessary
expansion boards and installing them. Instructions for installing the expansion
boards are provided in Section 2 Installing Electronic Telephone Units on page
2-10.
1.1
Unpacking the KSU
Unpack the KSU from the box. The contents include:
B408-B10 KSU
Wall Mounting Template
One-Sheet Installation Guide
4 Phillips Head Wood Screws
Speaker Relay Cable
Lithium Battery
2 Replacement Fuses
2 Tie Wraps
InfoSet 408 System Manual (CD-ROM)
The tools needed include:
Phillips Head Screwdriver
System Manual
2 - 1
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
1.2
Opening the KSU and Attaching the Batteries
The two batteries, located in the lower left corner of the KSU, provide
complete system backup power for approximately 30 minutes during power
outages. This provides backup for the entire system (the key system and
telephones) in case of a power outage. It is important that these be
connected before the system is installed.
1.
Remove the cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep from
misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift upward.
On/Off
Switch
Loosen or Tighten Screws
Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover
2.
Locate the backup batteries in the lower left side of the KSU. Identify
the battery cables, which are marked with blue and yellow tags.
Attach the blue tagged battery cable connector to the blue battery
terminal labeled CN3 (BATT1) and the yellow tagged battery cable
connector to the yellow battery terminal labeled CN4 (BATT2). The
battery terminals are located on the backplane of the KSU. The
connector tab should be placed over the terminal tab. There is only
one direction the tabs can be placed into the connector terminals,
therefore, you cannot attach them incorrectly.
2 - 2
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Connect
Batteries to
Battery
Terminals on
KSU Power
Supply
Figure 2-2 Attaching the Backup Battery Connectors
3.
Locate the lithium battery receptacle on the backplane of the KSU.
Using the provided battery, place it at an angle and push downward
and inward to install. The battery should slide into place.
Lithium Battery
Push downward and
inward
Figure 2-3 Installing the Lithium Battery
System Manual
2 - 3
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
4.
Locate the battery memory switch in the upper left side of the KSU.
Move the switch to the right toward the "HOLD" position.
Battery Memory
Switch
FLOW
MEMORY
CLEAR
HOLD
Slide the switch to the right
toward the HOLD position.
Figure 2-4 Setting the Battery Memory Switch
If you are wall mounting the KSU or want to install the speaker
relay receptacle, or any other optional equipment, do so now
before replacing the KSU cover.
To ensure memory retention, the battery memory switch must
be set to HOLD. (Refer to Figure 2-4 Setting the Battery
Memory Switch.)
5.
Replace the cover and tighten the screws.
6.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
2 - 4
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
1.3
Wall Mounting the KSU
A wall mounting template is provided with the KSU to help mark the
position of the KSU on the wall.
1.
Use the wall mounting template to mark the position of the KSU on
the wall. Be sure to select a sturdy wall (not metal).
2.
Insert two of the provided Phillips head wood screws into the wall.
Leave about 1/2" of the screw extruding from the wall.
3.
If the cover has been replaced, remove the KSU cover by loosening
the two bottom screws with a Phillips head screwdriver (the screws
remain in the cover to keep from losing them). Pull the cover away
from the KSU and lift upward.
4.
Hang the KSU onto the wall by matching the holes on the back of the
KSU with the screws in the wall. Lift up on the KSU and then lower
the KSU over the screws.
5.
Insert the two remaining Phillips head wood screws into the holes
located at the bottom corners of the KSU and tighten all of the wood
screws.
Slide over
Slide over
wall
wall
mounted
mounted
screw
screw
Use provided wood screws to secure to wall
Figure 2-5 Securing the KSU to the Wall
System Manual
2 - 5
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
If you want to install the speaker relay or any other optional equipment,
do so now before replacing the KSU cover.
6.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
7.
Using a standard RJ-11 cord (user-provided) attach the trunk lines
(ports) into the RJ-11 jacks marked 1 and 2. This provides
connection to the telephone service provider.
8.
Using a standard RJ-11 cord (user-provided) connect the telephones
into RJ-11 jacks marked 1~5. This connects your telephones to the
system.
Trunk Lines (CO Ports) 1 & 2
Telephone Lines 1~5
Figure 2-6 Connecting the Trunk Lines and Telephones to the System
9.
Plug the system into a standard wall outlet and turn the on/off switch
on the KSU to the ON position. (Refer to Chapter 1 System
Overview, Section 3 Power Requirements on page 1-5 for AC input
requirements.) Your system should now be fully operational. You
can use the system with the factory selected defaults or you can use
PC Programming or Telephone Programming to customize your
system. (Refer to Chapter 6 Telephone Programming on page 6-1
and Chapter 7 PC Programming on page 7-1.)
A dedicated outlet, separately fused and grounded, is required.
2 - 6
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
1.4
Installing the External Speaker Relay Cable
This cable allows you to connect a paging system with a power control
function that requires a relay contact. The power ratings are: 24 Vdc. 1A
or 120 Vac, 0.5A.
1.
Be sure the system is turned off during the installation process.
2.
Remove the KSU cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a
Phillips head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep
from misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift
upward. (Refer to Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover on page
2-2.)
3.
Remove the plastic knockout labeled SP RLY (located on the
sideplane of the KSU). You may need to use a screwdriver to gently
loosen the tabs holding the knockout.
Speaker Relay Knockout
Figure 2-7 Removing the Plastic Knockout
4.
Using the provided speaker relay cable, slide the gray RJ-11 end into
the slot inside the sideplane of the KSU marked SP RLY.
System Manual
2 - 7
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Slide RJ-11 connector
Wrap cable around
into slot
terminal post
Figure 2-8 Attaching the Speaker Relay Cables
5.
Locate the connector terminal labeled SP RLY on the KSU
backplane. Insert the small white connector end of the speaker relay
cable into the connector terminal on the backplane. Take the cables
and wrap them around the terminal post to the right of the terminal
connector.
2 - 8
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Insert connector into
connector terminal
Figure 2-9 Inserting the Connector into the Terminal
6.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
7.
Locate the RJ-11 jack (labeled SP RLY) located on the sideplane of
the KSU. Attach one end of an RJ-11 cord (user-provided) into the
jack and attach the other end into an paging control system
(user-provided).
Insert telephone cord into jack
Figure 2-10 Inserting the Telephone Cord into the Jack
8.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
System Manual
2 - 9
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
S
ECTION 2
INSTALLING ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE UNITS
Electronic Telephone Units (ETUs) can be installed at the same time that the KSU
is initially installed or individually as needed. The instructions for each individual
ETU assumes the unit is being installed at a later time, therefore, there are steps
which will not apply (i.e., turning the KSU off/on and removing the cover). If
installing the unit(s) at the same time as the KSU, ignore the steps that are not
applicable.
2.1
Installing the ESI(3)-B10 ETU
This board allows three additional telephones to be connected to the
system. A maximum of eight telephones can be connected to the system
when this board is installed.
1.
Be sure the system is turned off during the installation process.
2.
Remove the cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep from
misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift upward.
(Refer to Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover on page 2-2.)
3.
Carefully remove the ESI board from the protective packaging. Use
a wrist strap that is connected to the frame ground on the KSU to
avoid static discharge and possible damage to the KSU.
4.
Locate the area on the KSU backplane marked ESI and slide the ESI
board between the grooved posts. Press firmly down on the board
until the connector on the ESI board (labeled CN1) and the connector
terminal on the KSU backplane (labeled CN7) are securely attached.
2 - 10
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Secure board
firmly into the
connector
terminal
Slide the board
between the
grooved posts
Figure 2-11 Installing the ESI ETU into the KSU
5.
Using a Phillips head screwdriver, secure the ESI board to the KSU
by tightening the screw.
6.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
7.
Using a standard RJ-11 cord (user-provided) connect the additional
telephones into RJ-11 jacks marked 6~8.
Telephone Lines 6~8
Figure 2-12 Connecting the Telephones to the KSU
8.
Attach the other end of the RJ-11 cord into the telephones.
9.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
System Manual
2 - 11
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
2.2
Installing the COI(2)-B10 ETU
This board allows two additional trunk lines (for a maximum of four trunk
lines) and one additional fax/modem connection (for a maximum of three
fax/modem connections) to be installed.
1.
Be sure the system is turned off during the installation process.
2.
Remove the cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep from
misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift upward.
(Refer to Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover on page 2-2.)
3.
Carefully remove the COI board from the protective packaging. Use
a wrist strap that is connected to the frame ground on the KSU to
avoid static discharge and possible damage to the KSU.
4.
Locate the area on the KSU backplane labeled COI and slide the COI
board between the grooved posts. Press firmly down on the board
until the connector on the COI board (labeled CN1) and the
connector terminal (labeled CN16) are securely attached.
Slide the board
between the
grooved posts
Secure board
firmly into the
connector
Figure 2-13 Installing the COI ETU into the KSU
5.
Using a Phillips head screwdriver, secure the COI board to the KSU
by tightening the screw.
2 - 12
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
6.
Remove the plastic knockout labeled ISDN (located on the sideplane
of the KSU). You may need to use a screwdriver to gently loosen the
tabs holding the knockout.
ISDN
Figure 2-14 Removing the ISDN Knockout
7.
Locate the slot labeled ISDN on the inside of the KSU sideplane.
Using the RJ-45 cable (provided), slide the RJ-45 jack end into this
slot to provide connection for a third fax/modem port.
Insert RJ-45 into slot
Figure 2-15 Inserting the Cable into the ISDN Slot
8.
Insert the white connector end of the RJ-45 cable into the connector
terminal (labeled CN7) on the COI board.
White
connector end
of cable into
COI board
RJ-45 end of
cable into
ISDN slot
Figure 2-16 Inserting the Cable into the COI ETU
System Manual
2 - 13
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
9.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
10.
Using a standard RJ-11 cord (user-provided) connect the additional
trunk lines into RJ-11 jacks labeled 3 and 4.
Trunk Lines (CO Ports) 3 & 4
Figure 2-17 Connecting Additional Lines to the KSU
11.
Using a standard RJ-11 cord (user-provided) connect the optional
device into the RJ-45 to RJ-11 convertor cable (provided). Plug the
RJ-45 to RJ-11 convertor cable into the jack labeled ISDN. This port
allows you to install devices such as a facsimile machines, modems,
credit card machines, or answering machines. This jack can also be
used for power failure transfer (PFT) connection.
Fax/Modem Connection
or
Power Failure Transfer
RJ-45 to RJ-11
Convertor Cable
Figure 2-18 Connecting Optional Devices to the COI ETU
12.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
2 - 14
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
2.3
Installing the CID(2)-B10 UNIT
This unit provides caller ID. To support four caller ID ports you will need
two cards.
1.
Be sure the system is turned off during the installation process.
2.
Remove the KSU cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a
Phillips head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep
from misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift
upward. (Refer to Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover on page
2-2.)
3.
If the COI(2)-B10 ETU is installed, remove the screw with a Phillips
head screwdriver and carefully lift the board from the back plane of
the KSU.
4.
Remove the CID(2)-B10 Unit from the protective packaging. Use a
wrist strap that is connected to the frame ground on the KSU to avoid
static discharge and possible damage to the KSU.
5.
To install the first CID(2)-B10 Unit, locate the area labeled CID on the
KSU backplane. Line up the small hole in the CID board with the
post on the backplane of the KSU and slide the board into place.
Press firmly down on the board until the connector on the CID board
(labeled CN1) and the connector terminal on the KSU backplane
(labeled CN17) are securely attached. Using the two provided
screws, secure the board by tightening the screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver.
Plug CID board into
connector and
tighten with screws
Figure 2-19 Installing the First CID Unit
System Manual
2 - 15
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
6.
To install the second CID(2)-B10 Unit, attach the three plastic
standoffs (provided) to the CID board by pressing the large flanged
end into the hole on the board. Place these on the side of the CID
board where the CN1 connector is located.
COI(2)-B10 ETU
Large Flanged End
Figure 2-20 Installing the Second CID Unit
7.
Push the CID board into the three holes on the COI board (match the
connector on the CID board (labeled CN1) with the connector on the
COI board (labeled CN2). Press firmly to secure to two boards.
CID(2)-B10 ETU
COI(2)-B10 ETU
Figure 2-21 Piggybacking the COI(2) ETU and CID Unit
2 - 16
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
8.
Locate the area on the KSU backplane labeled COI and slide the COI
board between the grooved posts. Press firmly down on the board
until the connector on the COI board (labeled CN1) and the
connector terminal on the KSU backplane (labeled CN16) are
securely attached.
Slide the board
between the
grooved posts
Secure board
firmly into the
connector
terminal
Figure 2-22 Inserting the COI ETU into the KSU
9.
Using a Phillips head screwdriver, secure the COI board to the KSU
by tightening the screw.
10.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
11.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
System Manual
2 - 17
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
2.4
Installing the SLI(2)-B10 ETU
This board allows you to add two additional single line telephones to the
system. If the VMS(2)-B10 ETU is installed this board must be removed.
When the VMS(2)-B10 ETU is removed, voice mail is not longer provided.
When the SLI(2)-B10 ETU is installed, the PBR-B10 ETU must also be
installed.
1.
Be sure the system is turned off during the installation process.
2.
Remove the cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep from
misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift upward.
(Refer to Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover on page 2-2.)
3.
Carefully remove the SLI board from the protective packaging. Use a
wrist strap that is connected to the frame ground on the KSU to avoid
static discharge and possible damage to the KSU.
4.
Locate the area on the KSU backplane labeled SLI and slide the SLI
board between the grooved posts. Press firmly down on the board
until the connector on the SLI board (labeled CN1) and the connector
terminal on the KSU backplane (labeled CN14) are securely
attached.
Slide the board
between the
grooved posts
Secure board
firmly into the
connector
terminal
Figure 2-23 Installing the SLI ETU
2 - 18
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
5.
Using a Phillips head screwdriver, secure the SLI board to the KSU
by tightening the screw.
6.
Remove the plastic knockouts on the sideplane of the KSU in the
areas labeled SLT1 and SLT2. You may need to use a screwdriver to
gently loosen the tabs holding the knockout.
SLT1 & SLT2
Figure 2-24 Removing the Plastic Knockout for the SLT
7.
Using the provided RJ-11 cable (two cables are provided with the SLI
board), slide one of the jacks into the connector slot labeled SLT1
(located inside the sideplane) and insert the small white connector
end into the connector terminal on the SLI board labeled CN6-CN2
SLT1. Insert the other jack into the connector slot marked SLT2
(located inside sideplane) and insert the small white connector end
into the connector terminal on the SLI board labeled CN6-CN3 SLT2.
Be sure that you have matched the cables correctly Jack SLT1 to
CN6-CN2 SLT1 and Jack SLT2 to CN6-CN3 SLT2.
System Manual
2 - 19
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Connector Terminals on
the SLI Board
CN6
CN2
CN3
SLT1
SLT2
Figure 2-25 Attaching the RJ-11 Cables
8.
Wrap the cables around a terminal post (located on the side of the
interior of the KSU).
9.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
10.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
2 - 20
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
2.5
Installing the PBR-B10 ETU
The PBR board has four push button receiver (PBR) circuits. These
circuits detect and translate dual-tone multilfrequency (DTMF) signals
(often referred to as touchtone) sent by single line telephones, facsimile
machines, modems and other analog devices.
When the SLI(2)-B10 is installed, this board must also be installed.
1.
Be sure the system is turned off during the installation process.
2.
Remove the cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep from
misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift upward.
(Refer to Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover on page 2-2.)
3.
Carefully remove the PBR board from the protective packaging. Use
a wrist strap that is connected to the frame ground on the KSU to
avoid static discharge and possible damage to the KSU.
4.
Locate the area on the KSU backplane labeled PBR and slide the
PBR board between the grooved posts. Press firmly down on the
board until the connector on the PBR board (labeled CN1) and the
connector terminal on the KSU backplane (labeled CN12) are
securely attached.
Slide the board
between the
grooved posts
Secure board
firmly into the
connector
terminal
Figure 2-26 Installing the PBR ETU on the KSU
System Manual
2 - 21
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
5.
Using a Phillips head screwdriver, secure the PBR board to the KSU
by tightening the screw.
6.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
7.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
2.6
Installing the MIF-B10 ETU
The MIF board provides additional memory to operate PC programming
and Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR).
1.
Be sure the system is turned off during the installation process.
2.
Remove the cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep from
misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift upward.
(Refer to Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover on page 2-2.)
3.
Remove the ground plate (located at the bottom of the KSU) by
loosening the screw inside the KSU.
4.
Slide the DB-9 connector plate into the slot where the ground plate
was removed.
Remove Ground Plate and replace with DB-9 Connector Plate
Figure 2-27 Installing the DB-9 Connector Plate
2 - 22
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
5.
Place the green grounding wire on top of the DB-9 connector plate
and tighten with the screw.
Tighten with Screw
Grounding Wire
DB-9 Connector Plate
Figure 2-28 Attaching the Grounding Wire
6.
Carefully remove the MIF board from the protective packaging. Use
a wrist strap that is connected to the frame ground on the KSU to
avoid static discharge and possible damage to the KSU.
7.
Locate the area on the KSU backplane labeled MIF and slide the MIF
board between the grooved posts. Press firmly down on the board
until the connector on the MIF board (labeled CN1) and the
connector terminal on the KSU backplane (labeled CN11) are
securely attached.
Slide the board
between the
grooved posts
Secure board
firmly into the
connector
terminal
Figure 2-29 Installing the MIF ETU on the KSU
System Manual
2 - 23
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
8.
Using a Phillips head screwdriver, secure the MIF board to the KSU
by tightening the screw.
9.
Plug the white connector end of the DB-9 cable into the connector
terminal on the MIF board labeled CN2.
Plug white
connector end of
DB-9 cable into
CN2 connector
on MIF board
Figure 2-30 Plugging the DB-9 Cable into the DB-9 Connector
10.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
11.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
2 - 24
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
2.7
Installing the DPH-B10 ETU
The DPH board provides connection for two doorphones and two doorlock
releases.
1.
Be sure the system is turned off during the installation process.
2.
Remove the cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep from
misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift upward.
(Refer to Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover on page 2-2.)
3.
Carefully remove the DPH board from the protective covering. Use a
wrist strap that is connected to the frame ground on the KSU to avoid
static discharge and possible damage to the KSU.
4.
Locate the area on the KSU backplane labeled DPH and slide the
DPH board between the grooved posts. Press firmly down on the
board until the connector on the DPH board (labeled CN1) and the
connector terminal on the KSU backplane (labeled CN8) are securely
attached.
Slide the board
between the
grooved posts
Secure board
firmly into the
connector
terminal
Figure 2-31 Installing the DPH ETU into the KSU
5.
Using a Phillips head screwdriver, secure the DPH board to the KSU
by tightening the screw.
System Manual
2 - 25
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
6.
Remove the plastic knockout on the right side of the KSU in the area
marked DPH1, DPH2, DPR1, or DPR2. You may need to use a
screwdriver to gently loosen the tabs holding the knockout.
Remove Knockouts
Figure 2-32 Removing the Plastic Knockout for DPH and DPR
7.
To connect the doorphones use the RJ-11 connector cables (four
cables provided with board). Slide the jack end of the cable into the
slot (located on the inside of the sideplane) labeled DPH1, DPH2,
DPR1, or DPR2. Using the small white connector end of the cable,
press the connector into one of the connector terminals (located on
the DPH board) labeled CN6-CN2 (DPH1), CN6-CN3 (DPH2),
CN6-CN4 (RLY1), or CN6-CN5 (RLY2). Refer to the table for
connection configurations.
DPH Board Connectors
CN6
CN5
CN4
CN3
CN2
RLY2
RLY1
DPH2 DPH1
Figure 2-33 Connecting Doorphones
2 - 26
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
The table shows the connections that must be made between jacks,
located on the sideplane of the KSU and the connector terminals on
the DPH board. How the connections are made determines whether
you have doorphone connection or doorphone connection and
doorlock release for a doorphone. It is important that these
connections be made correctly for the doorphone to operate
properly.
Jack
Connector on
Description
DPH Board
Provides connection to doorphone #1
DPH1
CN6-CN2
(DPH1)
Provides connection to doorphone #2
DPH2
CN6-CN3
(DPH2)
CN6-CN2
Provides connection and doorlock
DPH1
(DPH1)
release for doorphone #1
and
and
DPR1
CN6-CN4
(RLY1)
CN6-CN3
Provides connection and doorlock
DPH2
(DPH2)
release for doorphone #2
and
and
DPR2
CN6-CN5
(RLY2)
8.
Wrap the connector cables wires around the post in the upper right
corner of the KSU.
Wrap cables
around post
Figure 2-34 Wrapping the Connector Cables
System Manual
2 - 27
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
9.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
10.
Using a standard RJ-11 cord (user-provided) connect the
doorphones to either DPH1 and/or DPH2 and attach the doorphone
relays to DPR1 and/or DPR2 as appropriate.
Attach RJ-11 Cords
Figure 2-35 Attaching RJ-11 Cords to the DPH and DPR Connectors
11.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
2 - 28
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
S
ECTION 3
INSTALLING BACKGROUND MUSIC FOR MUSIC ON HOLD AND EXTERNAL
SPEAKERS FOR PAGING
Background Music and Music on Hold can be provided using external sources
such as radio, CD player, etc.
To attach a music source (user-provided) for background music or music on hold,
insert one end of the RCA cable into the RCA jack labeled MOH BGM (located on
the sideplane of the KSU). Insert the other end of the RCA cables into the RCA
jack on the music source.
To attach an external speaker (user-provided) for paging, insert one end of the
RCA cable into the RCA jack labeled EXT SPK (located on the sideplane of the
KSU). Insert the other end of the RCA cable into the RCA jack on the external
speaker. Note that different connections are required for various types of speaker
connections.
Music on Hold and
External Speaker
Background Music
RCA Jack
RCA Jack
Figure 2-36 RCA Jacks for Music and Paging
System Manual
2 - 29
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
SECTION 4
CONNECTING TELEPHONES CORDS
4.1
Connecting InfoSet Telephones
1.
Plug the telephone cord into the modular jack on the bottom side of
the telephone. Attached the handset to the jack located on the
bottom right side of the telephone.
Handset
Telephone
Cord Jack
Figure 2-37 Connecting InfoSet Telephone Cords
2 - 30
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
4.2
Connecting Electra Elite Telephones
These instructions apply to all Electra Elite telephones that are used with
the InfoSet system.
1.
Plug the telephone cord into the modular jack on the bottom side of
the telephone. The handset is also attached to the bottom side of the
telephone.
Figure 2-38 Connecting Electra Elite Telephone Cords
2.
Lead the telephone and handset cords through the appropriate
grooves.
Figure 2-39 Leading Line Cords on the Electra Elite Telephone
System Manual
2 - 31
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
SECTION 5
INSTALLING A DTERM® CORDLESS LITE TELEPHONE
The Dterm Cordless Lite telephone [DTU-4R-1 (BK) TEL] can be used with the
InfoSet system. The cordless telephone is connected to the system using an ESI
port. The cordless telephone provides the user the ability to be away from their
desk, yet still be able to have access to their telephone.
5.1
Selecting an Installation Location
Select a location for the Dterm Cordless Lite telephone to avoid excessive
heat or humidity. The base unit should be placed on a desk or tabletop
near a standard 120 Vac outlet and within reach of the telephone line
connection on the Electra Elite telephone. Keep the base unit and the
handset away from sources of electrical noise (motors, fluorescent
lighting).
Figure 2-40 Dterm Cordless Lite Telephone
2 - 32
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
5.2
Connecting the Telephone Cords
The Dterm Cordless telephone can be connected to either the telephone
line or a line with the host telephone. Begin by unplugging the telephone
line cord from the host telephone to the telephone line.
There are two telephone line jacks on the back of the base unit of the Dterm
Cordless telephone; LINE IN and LINE OUT.
Using the telephone line cords supplied with the Dterm Cordless telephone,
make the following connections:
Connect the LINE IN jack to the telephone line.
Connect the LINE OUT jack to the host telephone.
Observe the following warnings during installation.
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
5.3
Applying Power to the Base Unit
1.
Plug the AC adapter cord into the AC adapter input jack on the base
unit.
Use only the AC adapter supplied with the Dterm Cordless
telephone.
2.
Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120 Vac wall outlet.
3.
Route the power cord where it does not create a trip hazard or where
it could become chafed and create a fire or other electrical hazards.
The AC adapter furnished with this phone can be equipped with
a polarized line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the
other). This plug fits into the power outlet only one way. If you
cannot insert the plug fully into the outlet, reverse the plug. If
the plug still does not fit, contact your facilities coordinator
about replacing the obsolete plug. Do not alter the shape of the
blades of the polarized plug.
System Manual
2 - 33
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
The Dterm Cordless telephone uses the black/yellow pair of
station cable. Always short the red wire to the black wire and
the green wire to the yellow wire inside the wall jack to reduce
interference.
Line IN from
Telephone Jack
Line OUT to Host
Figure 2-41 Connecting the Base Unit of the DTU-4R-1 (BK) TEL
S
ECTION 6
INSTALLING THE DTERM® CORDLESS TELEPHONE
The Dterm Cordless telephone [ETW-4R-1 (BK) TEL] can be used with the InfoSet
system. The cordless telephone is connected to the system using an ESI port.
The cordless telephone provides the user the ability to be away from their desk,
yet still be able to have access to their telephone.
6.1
Selecting an Installation Location
Select a location for the Dterm Cordless Telephone to avoid excessive heat
or humidity. The Base Unit of your Dterm Cordless telephone should be
placed on a desk or tabletop near a standard 120 Vac outlet and within
reach of the digital telephone line connection to your multiline telephone.
keep the base unit and handset away from sources of electrical noise
(motors, fluorescent lighting).
2 - 34
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
6.2
Connecting the Telephone Cords
The Dterm Cordless Telephone can be connected as a stand-alone device
or in conjunction with the digital host telephone. Begin by unplugging the
digital telephone line cord from your host telephone. There are two RJ-11
line jacks on the back of the base unit of the Dterm Cordless telephone:
"LINE IN" and "LINE OUT."
Using the telephone line cord supplied with your Dterm Cordless telephone,
make the following connections:
1.
Connect the jack labeled LINE IN to the digital telephone line jack.
2.
Connect the jack labeled LINE OUT to your digital host telephone
(when used in conjunction with a digital telephone).
3.
The Dterm Cordless Terminal uses the black/yellow pair of the station
cable for the InfoSet Type Telephone Interface. Always open the
red and green wires inside the wall jack. This is done to reduce the
potential for interference.
(Refer to Figure 2-42 Connecting and Supplying Power to the Base Unit on
the ETW-4R-1 (BK) TEL.)
6.3
Applying Power to the Base Unit
1.
Plug the AC adapter cord into the AC adapter input jack on the base
unit.
Use only the AC adapter supplied with the Dterm Cordless
telephone.
2.
Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120 Vac wall outlet.
3.
Route the power cord where it will not create a trip hazard or where it
could become chafed and create a fire or other electrical hazards.
Refer to Figure 2-42 Connecting and Supplying Power to the Base
Unit on the ETW-4R-1 (BK) TEL).
The AC adapter furnished with this phone may be equipped with a
polarized line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other.)
This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. If you are
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug.
If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your facilities coordinator
about replacing the obsolete outlet. Do not alter the shape of the
blades of the polarized plug.
System Manual
2 - 35
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
BK
RD
(Open)
To ESI
InfoSet Type
Telephone Interface
Line In
YL
GN
From Digital
(Open)
Telephone
Line
Line
Jack
Out
In
AC
Adapter
Line Out
To Digital Host Telephone
Figure 2-42 Connecting and Supplying Power to the Base Unit on the ETW-4R-1 (BK) TEL
S
ECTION 7
REPLACING BATTERIES AND FUSES
7.1
Replacing the Backup Batteries in the KSU
These batteries provide power for the system in case of a power outage.
Fully charged batteries provide power for approximately 30 minutes.
When replacing these batteries use a 12V 0.8A rechargeable lead acid
battery.
1.
Be sure the system is turned off during the installation process.
2.
Remove the cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep from
misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift upward.
(Refer to Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover on page 2-2.)
3.
Remove the screw that is attached to the grounding cable and loosen
the second screw that secures the metal plate to the batteries. Slide
the metal plate until it clears the remaining screw and lift upward to
remove the metal plate.
2 - 36
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
4.
Detach the batteries cables from the connector terminals CN3
(BATT1) and CN4 (BATT2).
5.
Lift out the old batteries.
6.
Insert the new batteries into the slots. Place the notched end of the
battery toward the casing on the KSU. Place the battery cables
between the inside of the battery and the posts located on the inside
of the battery casing.
Place notched end of
battery toward casing
Wrap battery wires inside
of posts
Figure 2-43 Inserting New Batteries into the KSU
7.
Replace the metal plate on top of the new batteries. Place the
grounding cable on top of the hole and tighten the screw using a
Phillips head screwdriver.
8.
Locate the backup batteries in the lower left side of the KSU. Identify
the battery cables, which are marked with blue and yellow tags.
Attach the blue tagged battery cable connector to the blue battery
terminal labeled CN3 (BATT1) and the yellow tagged battery cable
connector to the yellow battery terminal labeled CN4 (BATT2). The
battery terminals are located on the backplane of the KSU. The
connector tab should be placed over the terminal tab. There is only
one direction the tabs can be placed into the connector terminals,
therefore, you cannot attach them incorrectly.
System Manual
2 - 37
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Battery
Connectors
Grounding Cable
Battery Plate
Figure 2-44 Attaching the Battery Connectors
9.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
10.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
2 - 38
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
7.2
Replacing the Lithium Batteries in the KSU
This battery provides backup for system memory. When fully charge, it
provides a minimum of two years backup in case of a power outage.
1.
Be sure the system is turned off during the installation process.
2.
Remove the cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep from
misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift upward.
(Refer to Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover on page 2-2.)
3.
Locate the lithium battery on the backplane of the KSU. Push inward
and pull upward on the battery and lift it out.
Lithium Battery
Push inward and pull
upward
Figure 2-45 Replacing the Lithium Battery
4.
Using a CR2032 lithium battery, replace the battery by placing the
battery at an angle and pushing downward and inward. The battery
should slide into place.
5.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
6.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
System Manual
2 - 39
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
DO NOT PLACE USED BATTERIES IN YOUR REGULAR TRASH! THE
PRODUCT YOU PURCHASED CONTAINS A NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED
LEAD BATTERY. NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES MUST BE
COLLECTED, RECYCLED, OR DISPOSED OF IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
SOUND MANNER.
The incineration, landfilling or mixing of nickel-cadmium or sealed lead batteries
with the municipal solid waste stream is PROHIBITED BY LAW in most areas.
Contact your local solid waste management officials for other information
regarding the environmentally sound collection, recycling, and disposal of the
battery.
Nickel-Cadmium (or sealed lead) batteries must be returned to a federal or state
approved nickel-cadmium (or sealed lead) battery recycler. This may be where
the batteries were originally sold or a local seller of automotive batteries. Contact
your local waste management officials for other information regarding the
environmentally sound collection, recycling and disposal of the battery contained
in this product. For Ni-Cd batteries, you can also call 1-800-8-BATTERYSM if
further information is required.
2 - 40
Installation
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
7.3
Replacing a Fuse
Two replacement fuses are included with the KSU.
1.
Be sure the system is turned off during the installation process.
2.
Remove the cover by loosening the two bottom screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver (the screws remain in the cover to keep from
misplacing them). Pull the cover away from the KSU and lift upward.
(Refer to Figure 2-1 Removing the Front Cover on page 2-2.)
3.
Lift the plastic casing off of the fuse. (It may require a flat head
screwdriver to lift the plastic casing. Be careful not to damage the
components.)
4.
Lift out the old fuse and replace with a 250 volt, 2 amp slow blow
fuse.
Fuse
Figure 2-46 Replacing the Fuse
5.
Attach the cover and tighten the screws.
6.
Turn the on/off switch on the KSU to the ON position.
System Manual
2 - 41
Features
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
This section describes each feature and its operation. Features are listed
alphabetically by feature name.
S
ECTION 2
DIFFERENCES IN TELEPHONE TYPES
In this chapter the operations are written showing the keys on the InfoSet telephones.
Unless otherwise noted, the same key is also used on the Electra Elite telephones.
(Table 3-1 InfoSet and Electra Elite Telephone Keys shows the keys on the InfoSet
and Electra Elite telephones. In some cases, keys on the two types of telephones
may perform the same function but are labeled differently on the different telephones.
For example, the key used for speed dialing is labeled
on the InfoSet telephones
andon the Electra Elite telephones.
Table 3-1 InfoSet and Electra Elite Telephone Keys
InfoSet Keys
Electra Elite Keys
System Manual
3 - 1
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 3-1 InfoSet and Electra Elite Telephone Keys
InfoSet Keys
Electra Elite Keys
or
3 - 2
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
All Call Page
All Call Page allows simultaneous paging (internal and external) of all idle multiline
telephones. The page is heard over the built-in speaker on the telephone and/or over
external paging speakers.
Paging allows persons, away from their desk but within hearing distance of the
telephone or external speakers to respond to a page. The user can answer the page
by dialing a specified number.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Paging:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Page.
4.
Go on-hook.
Answering a page:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial
and answer the call.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
002-2
External Speaker Connection
N
002-3
External Paging Tone Assignment
N
002-4
Internal All Call Page Tone Assignment
N
System Manual
3 - 3
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Special Conditions
All Call Paging is directed only to telephones when "No External Speaker" is specified
in system programming.
A busy condition is generated if an All Call Page (internal or external) has been
originated at another telephone.
If an external paging call is made while a ringing tone is being sent over the external
speaker, ringing is temporarily suspended and the external paging call is performed.
Ringing resumes after the page is completed.
All Call Paging is supported for single line telephones. Single line telephones can be
used to answer an All Call Page.
A tone burst is generated as an alert tone to indicate the page.
3 - 4
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Ancillary Device Connection
This feature allows ancillary (peripheral) devices such as tape recorders, headsets,
single line telephones, to be connected to the system.
The feature is only available when using the Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Refer to the operation for the device that is being connected.
Special Conditions
When using ancillary equipment, the following units can be installed to provide
connection to the system.
Unit
Description
ACA-U Unit
AC Adapter - an AC adapter for use with the APR-U Unit, CTA-U
Unit, or HFU-U Unit.
ADA-U Unit
Ancillary Device Adapter - provides connection for cassette
recorders.
APR-U Unit
Analog Port Ringer - provides connection for a single line
telephone or modem.
CTA-U Unit
Computer Telephony Adapter (or TAPI - Microsoft Telephony
Application Programming Interface) - provides connection for a
PC.
HFU-U Unit
Handsfree Unit - provides connection for headsets allowing
handsfree operation.
Headset and handsfree units cannot be used simultaneously.
The APR-U Unit can only be connected to DTMF (touchtone) telephones.
System Manual
3 - 5
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Answer Hold
Answer Hold allows the multiline telephone user to answer an external call by
pressing the answer key (
). If the user is on a call, that call is placed on hold
when the new call is answered.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Answering a call when a call is in progress:
Press
to answer the call. If already engaged on a call, the existing call is placed
on hold.
Special Conditions
On Electra Elite telephones, the Answer Key () LED flashes when there is an
external line ringing. The Answer Key (
) on the InfoSet does not have an LED.
If using the Answer Key (
) to answer an internal or external call, and the existing
call is an internal call, doorphone call, or paging call; the existing call is disconnected.
The Answer Key () on Electra Elite telephones does not flash when an internal
call is received.
The Answer Key () on Electra Elite telephones does not flash when an external
call is received at another multiline telephone.
The Answer Key () on Electra Elite telephones does not flash during a ringing
transfer call.
This feature is not available during automatic redialing or conference calling.
3 - 6
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Answer Key
Users answer calls by simply pressing one key; the Answer Key (
).
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Answering a call:
Press
and or lift the handset.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
301 ~ 304
Day Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4
N
311 ~ 314
Night Ringing for Trunk Lines 1 ~ 4
N
Special Conditions
If more than one call rings into the system, the system processes the calls in the order
they are received. As a result, when the user presses
, calls are answered in
the order they are received.
If there is no external ringing call and
is pressed, "[BUSY]" is displayed in the
telephone LCD and a busy tone is heard.
Incoming external calls to other tenant groups cannot be answered by pressing
(ring tone is not provided for these calls).
On Electra Elite telephones, the Answer Key () LED flashes. When an
incoming external call is received, the red LED flickers at a higher speed to
differentiate from other types of calls. The Answer Key (
) on the InfoSet does
not have an LED.
An Electra Elite telephone must be programmed to provide an audible ring tone for
incoming calls before theLED will flash.
System Manual
3 - 7
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Attendant Positions
This feature allows the first two multiline telephones to be assigned as attendant
positions. These telephones can be used as "programming telephones" and can
perform certain attendant feature operations.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Listed below are the operations that can be performed using a telephone
assigned as an attendant position. The access code necessary to perform the
operation is also provided.
Operation
Access Code
System Reset for Call Forward All Calls,
Call Forward Busy/No Answer, and Do Not
Disturb
System Reset for Callback Request
System Reset Timed Alarm
System One-Touch Dialing
N/A
SMDR/PC Switching
SMDR Test Printing
Battery Low Indication Erase
System Speed Dialing
N/A
Also refer to the specific attendant related features listed below:
Automatic Callback on page 3-9
Callback Request on page 3-25
Call Forward - All Calls on page 3-28
One-Touch/Feature Access Keys User Programmable on page 3-115
Speed Dial System on page 3-151
Timed Alarm on page 3-164
Special Conditions
Only ports 1 and 2 (normally extensions 10 and 11) are used as attendant
positions.
3 - 8
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Automatic Callback
When calling a busy telephone and hearing a busy tone, users can set an automatic
callback. When both telephones are idle, the system signals the person who
originated the callback. When the callback originator answers, the system then
signals the other telephone user of the call.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Setting automatic callback when an internal party is called and busy tone is
heard:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial the extension number. Busy tone is heard.
3.
Dial
.
4.
After hearing the set tone, hang up.
Special Conditions
If an Automatic Callback is not answered within 30 seconds, the callback is released.
Automatic Callback can be set for any tenant group.
Automatic Callback can be set using a single line telephone.
An individual user can set a maximum of two callbacks from their telephone at one
time.
Only one Automatic Callback be set to a specific telephone; duplicate attempts are
ignored.
An Automatic Callback can only be answered at the telephone where it is set; other
user's cannot pickup the call from their telephones.
An Automatic Callback cannot be canceled by the user once it is set.
When a telephone is in Do Not Disturb mode, Automatic Callback cannot be set.
System Manual
3 - 9
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching
This feature allows the user to program the system to automatically switch from day to
night mode at a preset time.
Refer to Night Mode on page 3-111 for a description of manual day/night mode
switching.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
014
Night Mode Start Time (Assignment 1)
Y
015
Night Mode End Time (Assignment 1)
Y
016
Night Mode Start Time (Assignment 2)
Y
017
Night Mode End Time (Assignment 2)
Y
018-1 ~ 018-7 Night Mode Monday ~ Sunday
Y
Special Conditions
When the system is switched into night mode, night mode is applied system-wide and
the night mode features are enabled.
After powering on or resetting the time, the system checks the current system
program settings and switches to day/night mode depending on the time of day
detected.
3 - 10
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Automatic Hold
This feature allows a user to press a DSS key (Direct Station Selection) to page an
internal caller while an external call is in progress. Once the DSS key is pressed, the
external caller is automatically placed on non-exclusive hold.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Placing a call on automatic hold:
1.
While engaged on an external call, press the DSS key for the internal party. The
external caller is automatically placed on hold and the internal call is made.
2.
Talk with the called party or page the called party.
3.
If you want to return to the holding party, press the appropriate line key.
Special Conditions
After the preset hold recall timer expires, a hold recall is generated.
System Manual
3 - 11
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Automatic Pause - Behind PBX
When a user places an external call using speed dial, redial, or saved dial through a
PBX line, the system automatically inserts a pause into the dialed number.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
010
Outgoing Call Access Code for PBX
N
Special Conditions
The pause time is three seconds (fixed).
The initial value used by the system to indicate a pause is "9 -" (the system dials 9
and inserts a pause).
A maximum of six digits (three dialed digits and three pauses) can be programmed
for the PBX originating code. However, only one pause can be inserted between
digits (i.e., two pauses cannot be dialed consecutively).
3 - 12
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Automatic Redial
Automatic Redial simplifies repeated dialing to a busy telephone or when there is no
answer. When set, redialing is automatically repeated at preassigned intervals. The
intervals are assigned in system programming.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Setting automatic redial:
1.
After receiving a busy tone or when there is no answer, press .
2.
Press
.
3.
Press
.
4.
The call is redialed automatically. The number of redial attempts is assigned in
system programming. (Default = 7)
5.
When the called party answers, either lift the handset or press and begin
talking.
Note:
If the call is not answered, it is disconnected.
Canceling automatic redial:
Press or lift the handset, then restore the handset.
- OR -
Automatic redial is automatically canceled when the specified number of redial
attempts has been exceeded.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
005
Automatic Redial Timer
N
System Manual
3 - 13
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Special Conditions
If an external call is made using a PBX line, the call elapsed timer displays but does
not have any affect on the Automatic Redial condition.
If a disconnect or busy signal is detected by the system while on an analog external
line during Automatic Redial, the call is placed into wait mode (the time between redial
attempts).
When using an ISDN external line, a busy tone is not detected and the line is placed
into wait mode until release notification is received. Automatic Redial continues until
the programmed number of retries is exceeded.
If the user cancels Automatic Redial during wait mode, the external line is released
and the telephone returns to the idle condition (if the handset is in the cradle and the
speaker is off). If the handset is off of the cradle or the speaker is on, internal dialtone
is received.
After the number of redials has exceeded the programmed number of redial attempts,
the external line is released and automatic redialing ends.
The following operations are enabled during automatic redialing. A description of the
operation and the method for initiating the operation are provided below.
Microphone On/Off
+
Handset Mute On/Off
+
Automatic Redial Enable
+
Cancel Automatic Redial
Lift Handset (off-hook)
Speaker On
Handset in Cradle (on-hook)
Cancel Automatic Redial or
Releases External Line
If a call is answered at the telephone where Automatic Redial was initiated, redialing
is canceled.
When Automatic Redial is set, the line key LED on the telephone where Automatic
Redial is initiated lights green. The line key LED on all other telephones lights red.
If Automatic Redial is set while the handset is outside the cradle and the handset
remains outside the cradle during redialing, the user must press to cancel
Automatic Redial. If is not pressed, Automatic Redial restarts when the user
hangs up.
When outgoing calls are restricted on a line, automatic redialing is not allowed. When
a Automatic Redial is attempted using that line, an error tone is generated.
When a telephone is being used for automatic redialing, that telephone cannot be
used to place an external call on hold.
3 - 14
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Barge-in is not allowed while a telephone is being used for automatic redialing.
The user must manually cancel Automatic Redial; the system cannot automatically
cancel the operation.
Automatic Redial can only be set during a call attempt.
System Manual
3 - 15
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Automatic Release
This feature signals the system to release the line when an external caller abandons
the call.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and single
line telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
007
Disconnect Detection Duration
Y
Special Conditions
The timer for disconnect signal detection is specified in programming for external
lines. This setting applies system-wide.
If a disconnect signal is received, the external line is automatically disconnected.
If a telephone is disconnected while accessing an external line, the associated line
key LED goes off.
Automatic Release functions during holding (exclusive/non-exclusive) and
conference calling.
When the user is engaged on a single-party call and the external party hangs up, the
user receives a busy tone.
3 - 16
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Background Music - External Speakers
When connecting with a Background Music (BGM) source, background music is
provided over external speakers.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
002-2
External Speaker Connection
Y
002-6
Background Music Source
Y
011
Background Music Destination
Y
Special Conditions
Music is not heard over external speakers unless backgound music speaker
connection is specified in system programming.
If paging, external ringing, and background music occur at the same time, the system
prioritizes the order they are processed as follows:
1. External Speaker Paging
2. External Ringing
3. Background Music
System Manual
3 - 17
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Background Music - Multiline Telephone Speakers
When connected to a background music (BGM) source, multiline telephone users can
listen to music over the multiline telephone speakers, while the telephone is idle.
Feature Operation
Setting background music when the telephone is idle:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
(background music access code).
3.
Press
. Music is heard over the multiline telephone speakers.
Canceling background music:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
(background music access code).
3.
Press
. Music is stopped over the multiline telephone speakers.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
002-6
Background Music Source
Y
011
Background Music Destination
Y
3 - 18
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Special Conditions
Background music toggles between the set and cancel settings each time the
background music access code is dialed (
).
Background music volume is controlled by using up ( ) and down () volume
controls on the telephone.
The set/cancel setting is preserved in the backup memory of the telephone.
If background music has not been specified in system programming, "ERROR" is
displayed in the telephone LCD when attempting to set background music using the
set/cancel access code.
Background music is heard only when the telephone is in the idle condition.
Background music is temporarily suspended when the telephone is not idle.
System Manual
3 - 19
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Barge-In (Interrupting an External Call)
This feature allows one multiline telephone user to interrupt another user's
conversation. Barge-In can be programmed with or without an audible alert.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Interrupting a conversation using an outside line key:
1.
Press or lift the handset.
2.
When you hear dialtone, press
.
3.
Press
.
4.
Press
(line key) to be interrupted. Barge-In is enabled .
Special Conditions
Barge-in is enabled and disabled in system programming (default is disabled).
When barge-in is in progress, the conference key (
) LED flashes on the
telephone used to initiate barge-in and remains solid on the telephone where barge-in
occurs.
When barge-in is in progress and the user (where barge-in occurs) places their
existing call on hold, the caller who initiated the barge-in is also placed on hold. When
the call is picked up again (taken off of hold), the barge-in caller is also able to resume
listening to the conversation.
Barge-in also works for telephones programmed to only receive calls (i.e., those
telephones restricted from dialing out).
Barge-in is not allowed during the following conditions:
·
when Automatic Redial is in progress.
·
when dialing is in progress.
·
before an internal user answers a call or before the user initiates an outgoing
external call.
·
all conditions other than an external call in progress (i.e., hold, conference call,
etc.).
·
the called telephone is a member of a different tenant group.
A single line telephone cannot be used to initiate a barge-in. However, single line
telephone conversations can be interrupted.
3 - 20
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
A telephone cannot be used to initiate a barge-in if it is part of a conference.
A barge-in cannot be completed if the telephone that is the target of the barge-in is
part of a conference.
If all of the conference circuits in the system are in use, no barge-in is allowed.
Barge-in requires the use of a conference circuit.
System Manual
3 - 21
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Battery Backup System Memory
A battery is provided on the central processing unit (CPU) in the KSU. This battery
retains system memory if the power fails. When fully charged, a new lithium battery
maintains backup power for a minimum two years. This allows the system to return to
normal operation once power is restored.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Special Conditions
Programming and status condition is retained for the following:
·
Background Music
·
Call Forward All Calls
·
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
·
Clock/Calendar
·
D o N ot Disturb
·
Incoming Ring Mode for Single Line Telephones (when the Electra Elite APR-U
Unit is attached)
·
LCD Contrast (Electra Elite telephones only)
·
Microphone Status
·
Night Mode
·
Redial
·
Room Monitor
·
Speed Dial Entries (Telephone/System)
·
System Data
·
Timed Alarms
·
Volume
Status condition is not retained for the following:
·
Automatic Callback
·
Trunk Queuing
3 - 22
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Battery Backup System Power (Built-In)
A built-in battery provides complete system operating power for approximately 30
minutes. This allows the entire telephone system (key system and telephones) to
remain operational during a power outage.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Special Conditions
The backup batteries are charged from the power supply.
System Manual
3 - 23
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Busy Lamp Field - Multiline Telephones
The Busy Lamp Field (BLF) is an LED on the multiline telephone which is used to
indicate the telephone status (idle, in-use, do-not-disturb mode, etc.).
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Special Conditions
Busy Lamp Field indication is provided for the following conditions:
Busy Lamp Field
Condition
Slow Red Flash
Do Not Disturb Set
Telephone in programming mode
Feature Key assignment in progress
Scrolling in progress
Fast Red Flash
Call Forward All Calls Set
Call Forward Busy/No Answer Set
Solid Red
Telephone is busy
Off
Telephone is idle
If a line key is not assigned as a trunk line, it can be assigned as a Busy Lamp Field.
3 - 24
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Callback Request
This feature is used to leave notification at the called party's telephone that you have
called.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones (sending
and answering callback request) and single line telephones (sending callback
request).
The telephone must be set for Dual Tone Multifrequency mode (touchtone) for this
feature to be used.
Feature Operation
Setting a callback request.
When calling and receiving a busy tone, press
.
Note:
When callback request is set, the
LED flashes on the calling party's
telephone and the telephone display (for those telephones equipped with an LCD)
at the called party's telephone indicates the calling party's extension number.
Returning a callback request:
1.
Lift the handset or press .
2.
Press
.
Canceling a callback request from a multiline telephone:
If the called party does not respond to the callback, call again.
System Manual
3 - 25
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Canceling a callback request from an attendant position:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Press
.
Note:
When this procedure is performed, do not disturb and all call forward
settings are also cleared.
When canceling callback request from an attendant position, all callback
requests are cleared system-wide.
Special Conditions
A telephone user can set callback requests to more than one telephone. Callback
requests can be sent to other telephone users regardless of the tenant group to which
they belong.
A telephone that is not equipped with an LCD answers a callback in the same way
users of telephones equipped with an LCD.
A maximum of three callback requests can be set to an individual telephone.
Single line telephone users can set callback requests. Single line telephone users
cannot receive callback requests.
A callback request can be set to a telephone that has do not disturb set.
If a power outage occurs, all callback requests are canceled.
3 - 26
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Call Elapsed Timer
This timer appears in the LCD (liquid crystal display) on the telephone. The timer
keeps track of the amount to time that has elapsed since the call was answered.
When the user hangs up, the timer disappears from the LCD.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Special Conditions
The call elapsed timer disappears from the LCD when a call is placed on hold
(exclusive and non-exclusive). While the call is on hold, the timer continues counting
and is redisplayed when the call is removed from hold, when the call is transferred
and answered, or when the call is transferred and recalls to the telephone that
originated the transfer.
The elapsed call time is maintained separately for each external line. When more
than one external line is placed on hold, the timer is redisplayed for each call as it is
removed from hold.
During an add-on conference, which includes at least one external line, the elapsed
call time of the last external line that is seized is displayed in the LCD.
The call elapsed timer is not displayed while a call transfer or tone override is received
or when dialing is performed during a call using an external line. The call elapsed
timer redisplays five seconds after the last digit is dialed.
During an add-on conference that contains one external line and two internal lines,
the elapsed conference time is displayed on the LCD of all the multiline telephones
involved in the conference.
The maximum time that can be indicated is 59 minutes and 59 seconds. After 59
minutes and 59 seconds is reached, the timer resets to 00 minutes and 00 seconds.
System Manual
3 - 27
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Call Forward - All Calls
This feature is used to forward calls received at one multiline telephone to another
telephone. This feature can also be set or cancelled from the telephone where the
calls will be forwarded. Forwarding can be cancelled for the entire system using a
telephone assigned as an attendant position.
Feature Operation
Setting call forward:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
(access code).
3.
Dial the extension number or telephone number where calls will be forwarded.
4.
Press
.
Canceling an individual call forward setting:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the extension number of the forward destination or
.
4.
Press
.
Canceling call forward system-wide from an attendant (normally extension 10 or
11):
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Press
.
Special Conditions
All internal and transferred calls to the telephone follow the forwarding settings
assigned to that telephone.
Any telephone in the system can be the call forward destination for any number of
other telephones.
Call Forward All Calls can be directed to any other telephone in the system even if
the telephone is the member of a different tenant group.
3 - 28
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Any telephone in the system can be set to forward all calls to a voice mail port.
Call Forward All Calls settings can be individually reset for each telephone by
clearing the setting using
.
If two internal callers attempt to call one another and they have each other as their
Call Forward All Calls destination, a busy tone is generated.
The Call Forward All Calls setting takes precedence over the Call Forward - Busy/
No Answer setting when both are enabled.
When Call Forward All Calls is assigned to a One-Touch Key and that key is
equipped with an LED, the LED lights red when the call forward feature is enabled.
If a telephone is programmed for Direct Inward Termination (DIT), allowing calls to
bypass the attendant and ring directly at a designated extension, call forwarding
follows assigned to that telephone.
On InfoSet telephones, "Call FWD" is displayed in the telephone LCD when the Call
Forward All Calls is enabled.
Only one call forward can be set to the same telephone at one time. The first call
forward must be canceled before setting another call forward. If multiple call forward
destinations are entered, only the last destination is valid; all other entries are
canceled.
Only the telephone that is used to originate Call Forward All Calls can cancel the
Call Forward All Calls setting.
A maximum of two call forward destinations can be "chained." For example,
telephone A is set to forward calls to telephone B and telephone B is set to forward
calls to telephone C. Telephone C attempts to forward to D. Telephone C will be the
final forward destination for both telephones; forwarding to D is not allowed.
System Manual
3 - 29
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
This feature is used to forward calls received at one multiline telephone to another
telephone or to an Attendant Position. This feature can also be set or canceled from
the telephone where the calls will be forwarded. This feature only applies to internal
calls.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Setting call forwarding:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the extension number of the telephone where calls will be forwarded.
4.
Press
.
Canceling an individual call forward setting:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the extension number of the forward destination or
.
4.
Press
.
Canceling call forward system-wide from an attendant (extension 10 or 11):
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Press
.
3 - 30
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
008
Call Forward No Answer Duration
N
Special Conditions
After receiving internal dialtone, a single line telephone can set busy/no answer by
dialing an access code (
) and the destination extension number.
All internal calls, Direct Inward Termination (DIT) calls, and ringing transfer calls
directed to the target extension are forward to the call forward destination.
A telephone can be the destination of multiple busy/no answer settings (i.e., more
than one telephone in the system can have the same telephone as the call forward
destination).
An attendant (extension 10 or 11) can be used to reset the call forward - busy/no
answer setting system-wide. When resetting Do Not Disturb (DND) calls, Call
Forward - All Calls, Call Forward - Busy/No Answer, all calls are reset system-wide.
Call Forward Busy/No Answer settings can be individually reset for each multiline
telephone by clearing the setting using
.
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer calls can be directed to telephones that are members
of a different tenant group.
If two internal callers attempt to call one another and they have each other as their
Call Forward Busy/No Answer destination, and one of the parties is busy, the call
is placed into call waiting status.
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Call Forward Busy/No Answer when
both features are enabled.
System Manual
3 - 31
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Programming Call Forward Busy No/Answer to operate on a one-touch key
simplifies enabling the feature. By pressing the one-touch key while the telephone is
in idle mode enables the feature. The LED associated with the LED lights red when
the feature is enabled.
The one-touch key toggles to turn the busy no/answer feature on and off. When
enabled the LED lights red and when disabled the LED is not lighted.
Multiple one-touch keys can be assigned with different call forward destinations.
When a one-touch key is pressed to enable the feature, any previous call destination
setting is canceled. For example, if the user presses a one-touch key where
extension 14 is the call forward destination and extension 12 is the previous setting,
then the setting for extension 12 is canceled. The associated LED for the one-touch
key used to set extension 12 as the destination goes off and the associated LED for
the one-touch key used to set extension 14 as the destination lights red.
If a one-touch key is assigned to a non-existent extension number and the key is
pressed, the busy/no-answer settings are preserved but none of the LEDs change.
An error is displayed in the telephone LCD.
Only one call forward busy/no answer can be set from the same telephone at one
time. The first call forward must be canceled before setting another call forward. If
multiple call forward destinations are entered, only the last destination is valid; all
other entries are canceled.
Call forward busy/no answer setting do not follow chained forwarding.
Only the extension used to set/reset the call forward busy/no answer setting can be
used to change that setting.
Voice announced calls will not follow the call forward busy/no answer settings.
3 - 32
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Caller Identification
The Caller Identification (Caller ID) feature allows the user to see the calling party's
name and phone number in their telephone display.
A CID-B10 Unit is required to provide caller identification. Two CID units are required
to provide caller identification for all four telephone lines.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Special Conditions
Caller ID uses information sent from the central office and displays the information
(name and/or number) in the telephone LCD. If Caller ID information is not provided,
the system displays the number assigned in system programming to the trunk line.
When displayed, the caller's number is shown on the top row of the display and the
their name on the second row of the display. Both the name and number are
proceeded by the trunk line number where the call rings into.
Display Example:
If the call is an internal call, Caller ID information is not provided from the central
office, the system searches the system speed dialing entries and if the number and
associated name is stored in system data, that information is displayed in the
telephone LCD.
There is no system limitation to the number of telephones that can display Caller ID
information.
When multiple external calls ring into the system, Caller ID information is stored for
each of the incoming calls. Caller ID information is displayed in the order that the calls
are detected (i.e., the first incoming trunk call is detected and the information is
displayed until the call is answered; as additional calls are answered, the stored
Caller ID information is displayed until answered).
System Manual
3 - 33
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Caller ID Scrolling
When caller identification information is provided, the user can browse through the list
of the last 20 numbers by pressing
and . The user can dial the displayed
Caller ID number by pressing or by lifting the handset.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones equipped
with a display.
Feature Operation
Confirming Caller ID information:
1.
While the telephone is idle, press
.
2.
Press
to display the most recent Caller ID information. The date and time
that the call was received and the caller's number are displayed.
3.
To scroll through the list of Caller ID information, continue to press
.
Note:
When the end of the list is reached, the first Caller ID is displayed when
is pressed.
Placing a call using the displayed Caller ID information:
While the Caller ID information is displayed, press
(external line key),
lift the handset , or press .
Special Conditions
General
If no Caller ID information exists, the telephone remains idle when
and
are pressed.
If
(ex terna l lin e key) is p re ssed w hile scrollin g throu gh th e C alle r ID info rm ation ,
the dis play ed nu m b er is d iale d.
When the call is received, both the name and number are displayed (if provided).
When scrolling only the number is displayed.
3 - 34
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Call Pickup Group
This feature allows any user to pickup a call that is intended for another user.
A call pickup group allows telephones in the system to be grouped together so users
can pick up any incoming calls in that group by dialing a preassigned two-digit
number. Groups are defined using tenant assignment.
The feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and single
line telephones.
Feature Operation
Answering a call:
User B performs this procedure to answer a call that is received at user A's telephone.
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial the access code. Default access codes are:
= Pick up calls ringing in a different tenant group (CO/PBX calls
only)
= Pick up calls ringing in the same tenant group (Internal and Direct
Inward Termination calls)
= Pick up ISDN calls only 9 (available with software version 2.0 or
higher)
3.
Speak with the calling party.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
401
Trunk Line Assignment for Tenant 1
N
402
Trunk Line Assignment for Tenant 2
N
403
Telephone-to-Tenant Assignment
N
System Manual
3 - 35
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Special Conditions
When there is more than one type of call that rings into the system, the system picks
up calls in the following order:
·
Internal Voice/Tone/Call Waiting
·
Ringing Transfer
·
Incoming External Calls to another Tenant
If there is more than one call ringing into the system, calls are picked up beginning
with the lowest numbered extension (i.e., if extension 10 and 11 ring at the same time,
extension 10 is picked up first).
If there are no calls and a users attempts to pick up a call using one of the call pick
up access codes, "BUSY" is displayed in the telephone LCD.
When more than one Direct Inward Termination (DIT)/Voice Mail/Automated
Attendant (AA) ringing transfer call rings at a telephone, they are picked up in the
order in which the system first detects the calls.
External calls picked up by a user in another tenant group can be taken off of hold by
the user who placed them on hold.
Incoming internal calls call on be picked up by a user in the same tenant group.
Only ringing transferred calls can be picked up by users who are members of another
tenant group. Once the call is picked up it can be placed on hold and removed from
hold as necessary.
3 - 36
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Call Restriction
This feature allows outgoing calls to be restricted. Dialing is restricted based on the
first eight digits that are dialed. The restricted numbers are entered and stored into
tables accessed by system programming. When a user dials a restricted number, an
error tone is sent and "ERROR" appears in the LCD of the multiline telephone.
This feature allows companies to save on long distance charges by restricting number
that can be dialed. Restriction can be placed on individual telephones within the
system.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Dialing a restricted number from an external line:
1.
Lift the handset or press .
2.
Dial the number. The system checks for restricted or authorized numbers. If
the number matchs a number recorded in one of the restriction tables, the
system returns an error tone.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
020~021
Restricted Dialing Tables 1 & 2
Y
022~023
Authorized Dialing Tables 1 & 2
Y
219
Restricted Calling for External Calls
Y
220
Restricted Dialing Table Selection
Y
221
Authorized Dialing Table Selection
Y
222
Authorized Dialing for External Speed Dial Calls
N
223
Automatic Outgoing Calling
Y
System Manual
3 - 37
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Special Conditions
There are four tables that contain numbers that the system accesses for call
restriction: two tables containing restricted numbers (numbers that cannot be dialed)
and two tables containing numbers that are authorized (numbers that can be dialed).
Each telephone can be assigned to access any of the tables or individual telephones
can be assigned to access all four tables.
Each entry in the authorized and restricted tables is a maximum of eight digits. Each
table can have a maximum of eight entries.
Individual telephones can be programmed to override the entries in the authorized/
restricted tables using speed dialing.
If the same number is entered in the authorized table and the restricted table, the
entry in the restricted table takes precedence.
At system default, no restrictions are imposed for calling.
Call restriction works in systems that must dial a digit (such as 9) when making
external calls.
3 - 38
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Call Restriction Override using System Speed Dial
This feature allows telephones, which have been be restricted from making outgoing
calls, to make calls using the preassigned system speed dial numbers.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Using call restriction override by dialing a system speed dial number:
1.
Press
(line key programmed to access an outside line).
2.
Press
or.
3.
Dial
~
to indicate the desired speed dial memory location.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
222
Authorized Dialing for External Speed Dial Calls
Y
Special Conditions
System speed dial memory locations (
~
) can be assigned to
override the toll restriction settings.
System Manual
3 - 39
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Call Transfer
This feature allows any user to transfer an external call to any other system user. The
user receiving the call simply goes off-hook to answer the call. The call can be
transferred using two methods:
A user transfers the call and hangs up. The caller receiving the transferred call
hears ringing and answers the call.
A user transfers a call and waits the called user to answer. Once the call is verbally
announced, the caller who transferred the call hangs up.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Transferring a call:
1.
Press . The call is put on hold.
2.
Call the party's extension where the call will be transferred.
3.
Press
or hang up.
Transferring a call with a call in progress:
1.
Press
. The call is put on hold.
2.
When you hear the dialtone, dial the party's extension number where the call
will be transferred.
3.
When the called party answers, press
or hang up.
- OR -
When the called party answers, voice announce the transfer and hang up.
- OR -
If the called extension is busy or there is no answer, press the line key where
the external call is holding or press
to return to the holding internal call.
3 - 40
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Transferring a call from a single line telephone with a call in progress:
1.
Hookflash.
2.
When you hear dialtone, dial the extension number where the call will be
transferred.
3.
Hang up.
- OR -
If the called extension is busy or the call is denied, retrieve the call by
pressing hookflash.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
001-4
Ringing Transfer
N
001-5
Automatic Transfer
N
001-9
Single Line Telephone Hookflash Assignment
N
Special Conditions
Outgoing trunk line calls can be transferred.
Calls can be transferred to extensions that are members of a different tenant.
If the transferred call is not answered at the destination extension within 30 seconds,
the call recalls to the transferring extension. An alarm tone is generated at the
transferring extension and the telephone's display shows the destination extension
number.
Calls can be transferred to a telephone even when the telephone is busy or is in Do
Not Disturb mode.
A 3-party conference can be established while an outside call is in progress by
pressing
and dialing the number. When the party answers, press
.
System Manual
3 - 41
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
When a call is transferred, the outside line key LED flashes green on the destination
telephone and flashes red on all other telephones in the tenant group.
Transferred calls follow the call forwarding that is on the destination telephone (if
enabled).
A single line telephone cannot be used to transfer a call if Function "001-9 Single
Line Telephone Hookflash Assignment" is set to "Hookflash".
3 - 42
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Call Waiting Indication
The system provides a visible indication to the called party that they have an incoming
call. This indication allows the user to put the existing call on hold and answer the
incoming call, terminate the existing call and answer the incoming call, or ignore the
incoming call.
This feature is available for InfoSet or Electra Elite multiline telephones and single line
telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Special Conditions
When an internal call is received, the extension number user who is calling is
displayed in the telephone LCD.
When an external call is received, the external line where the call is received flashes
red.
System Manual
3 - 43
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Character Registration
The feature allows users to assign names to system and individual speed dial
numbers and to numbers assigned to one-touch keys. The telephone number and the
associated name are displayed in the telephone LCD when the number is dialed.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Entering alphanumeric characters:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(for Elite telephones).
3.
Either dial the speed dial memory location number (
~
or
~
) or press the appropriate programmed speed
dial key.
4.
Press
to enable alphanumeric character entry.
5.
Enter the name associated with the stored number by using the dial pad keys.
(Refer to Table 3-2 Dial Pad Keys Used When Entering Names.)
6.
Press
to store the name and associated telephone number into memory.
Verifying alphanumeric characters:
For a specific memory location:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
( for Elite telephones).
3.
Enter the speed dial memory location number (
~
or
~
).
Note:
Telephone numbers and alphanumeric characters are displayed for 10
seconds.
For a specific one-touch/feature access key:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press the one-touch/feature-access key.
Note:
Telephone numbers and alphanumeric characters are displayed for 10
seconds.
3 - 44
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Deleting a name and/or telephone number:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(for Electra Elite telephones).
3.
Press the speed dial memory location number (
~
or
~
).
4.
Press
to delete only the telephone number. Press
and
to delete
the name and number.
Table 3-2
Dial Pad Keys Used When Entering Names
Key
Usage
Shifts the cursor one character to the left and deletes
the character.
Creates a blank character to the right of the cursor.
Toggles between uppercase and lowercase letters.
1
A B C, a b c, or 2
D E F, d e f, or 3
G H I, g h i, or 4
J K L, j k l, or 5
M N O, m n o, or 6
P Q R S, p q r s, or 7
T U V, t u v, or 9
W X Y Z, w x y z, or 9
&
@
or
0
Toggles between alphabetic and numeric entry.
` - :
(for Elite
telephones)
System Manual
3 - 45
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Special Conditions
If consecutive speed dialing is used, alphanumeric data in redial memory is changed.
The input character mode is indicated in the second line of the telephone LCD. When
only numeric characters can be entered, "NUMERIC" is displayed in the LCD. When
alphanumeric characters can be entered, "ALPHA" is displayed in the LCD.
When a call is originated using speed dialing (whether dialing is done manually or
using a one-touch key assigned a speed dial number) and the speed dial number has
alphanumeric data associated with it, old alphameric data is cleared.
Alphanumeric characters can be assigned to a speed dial memory location number
or a one-touch key.
Alphanumeric data associated with system speed dialing can only be entered,
modified or erased using an attendant multiline telephone (normally extension 10 or
11) or using PC programming.
A maximum of 16 characters can be assigned to a speed dial number.
3 - 46
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Clock/Calendar Display
On multiline telephones equipped with an LCD (liquid crystal display), the time (hour
and minutes) and the date (day, day of week and year) are displayed.
This feature is available on InfoSet and Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Setting the clock/calendar:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Press the appropriate dial pad keys to enter the time.
Note:
Use
to move the cursor to the left and
to move the cursor to the
right.
4.
Place the cursor under a.m. or p.m. and press
(for the Elite
telephones) to select.
5.
Press to switch between the date and time displays.
6.
Press
(for the Elite telephones) to change the day of the week.
7.
Dial
and move the cursor to the date.
8.
Using the dialpad, enter the date.
9.
Move the cursor to the desired month and press
(for the Elite
telephones) to select the month.
10.
Dial and move the cursor to the year.
11.
Using the dialpad, enter the year.
12.
Press
to save the changes and exit.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
002-7
Time Format for Telephone Display
N
System Manual
3 - 47
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Special Conditions
Date and time can be changed using any multiline telephone in the system.
By default, the clock is set to January 1, 1999 (Friday), 12:00 a.m.
If
is pressed while setting the date and time, the procedure is canceled and
exits. The telephone is returned to the idle condition.
Leap years are automatically set when the date (year) is specified.
The time format (12-hour or 24-hour) is set using Function "002-7 Time Format for
Telephone Display".
Daylight savings time is not switched automatically, this must be done manually.
If "99" is entered, the date is 1999. If set 00~98 is entered, the date is 2000~2098.
3 - 48
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Confirmation Dial
This feature allows users to dial a telephone number which is displayed for
confirmation during speed dialing, one-touch dialing, and scrolling caller identification
numbers.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Confirmation dialing using a speed dial memory location number:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(for Electra Elite telephones).
3.
Dial the speed dial memory location number to display the stored telephone
number.
4.
Press
(the appropriate outside line key) while the telephone number is
displayed. The system automatically dials the displayed number.
Confirmation dialing using a one-touch key:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(one-touch key) you want to confirm.
3.
Press
(the appropriate outside line key) while the telephone number is
displayed. The system automatically dials the displayed number.
Special Conditions
Confirmation dialing is available for the following conditions:
·
Speed Dialing (system, extension and nested speed dialing)
·
One-Touch Dialing
·
Caller ID Scrolling
Simple searches are possible when speed dial numbers are displayed by using # or
. For example, if 19 is displayed and # is pressed, the display scrolls to 20.
# = scrolls to the next stored speed dial number
= scrolls to the previous stored speed dial number
If an empty speed dial memory location is detected during a simple search, "Empty"
is displayed in the telephone LCD.
System Manual
3 - 49
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
When performing simple searches and the last speed dial memory location number
is reached, the system scrolls to the first speed dial memory location number. For
example, if 199 is displayed (system is set for 200 memory locations) and the user
presses #, the system "rolls over" to 000. If 000 is displayed and is pressed, the
system "rolls back" to 199.
When calling preference is set to CO/PBX line preference using Function "209
Outgoing Call Priority Mode", confirmation dialing is accomplished by lifting the
handset.
Call restriction applies during confirmation dialing.
3 - 50
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Conference Add-On
This feature allows conference calling. A maximum of three parties (various
combinations of internal and external callers) are allowed in each conference.
Conference calling increases efficiency by allowing multiple parties to enter into a
conversation. Music is provided to callers while they are on hold waiting to enter the
conference.
The possible conference combinations are:
One internal party and two external parties.
Two internal parties and one external party.
Three internal parties.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Initiating a conference call with a call in progress:
1.
If adding an internal party, dial the party's extension number. If adding an
external party, dial the party's telephone number.
2.
Press . The party is put on hold.
3.
If adding an internal party, dial the party's extension number. If adding an
external party, press the appropriate line key to access an outside line, then dial
the party's telephone number.
4.
Pres
to add the caller on hold to the conference.
Setting up a conference call using a single line telephone while a call is in
progress:
1.
Press hookswitch to place the first party on hold.
2.
Dial the party's extension number.
Note:
Only internal callers can be added to a conference when a single line
telephone is used to initiate the conference call.
3.
Press hookswitch again to add the holding party to the conference.
System Manual
3 - 51
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
106
Automatic Release of Trunk Line
N
Special Conditions
Barge-In is not allowed for any outside line or telephone that is part of a conference.
Only one internal party, who is a part of a conference, can put a conference on hold.
The telephone used to put the conference on hold cannot participate in another
conference.
When a conference consists of two outside lines and one internal line and the
conference is put on hold and one of the outside lines is selected, the conference is
canceled. The other outside line is not dropped but is on exclusive hold.
If Function 106 "Automatic Release of Trunk Line" is enabled in programming and the
outside line is released, the remaining parties continue talking. If automatic release
is not disabled, a busy tone is heard and the conference is terminated.
When three internal parties are in conference and one of the parties exits the
conference, the two remaining parties resume a 2-party call.
The
LED lights red when a conference is in progress.
When both of the conference circuits are busy, both of the
LEDs light red.
When a multiline telephone is used to place a call on conference hold, the lines keys
associated with the conference hold flashes green (indicating exclusive hold) and the
LED flashes red. On other telephones in the system, the
LED is solid red.
A 3-party internal conference can also be put on hold.
When an external line is on hold, recall is provided for single line telephones (if the
handset is placed in the cradle).
3 - 52
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
During a conference call some of the keys on the telephone can be used and some
cannot be used, these are listed below.
Available Keys:
Accesses available functions.
Toggles to turn the microphone on and off.
Toggles to set and reset handset mute.
Places a conference on hold.
Toggles to turn the speaker on and off or cancels a conference.
Unavailable Keys:
Outside line key that is part of a conference.
One-touch keys programmed for a function.
or
or
System Manual
3 - 53
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Consecutive Speed Dial
Consecutive Speed Dial enables users to simplify complicated dialing sequences by
allowing them to consecutively dial a combination of system speed dial or individual
speed dial numbers and/or manually dialed numbers.
This feature is useful when verifying credit cards, accessing service providers, or any
other application that requires dialing a series of numbers (i.e., authorization codes,
customer numbers, etc.).
This feature is available for InfoSet or Electra Elite multiline telephones and single line
telephones.
Feature Operation
Consecutive dialing:
1.
Go off-hook by lifting the handset or pressing . .
2.
When you hear dialtone, use any combination of manual dialing or speed
dialing.
Consecutive dialing using a single line telephone:
1.
Go off-hook by lifting the handset.
2.
When you hear internal dialtone, enter the speed dial access code (
)
and dial the speed dial memory location number.
3.
Manually dial the desired number.
Special Conditions
If a call is made using a speed dial number that has a "name" defined for it, the
associated alphanumeric "name" is displayed.
Each speed dial number can have a maximum of 24 digits. Each pause, flash, # and
counts as a digit.
When using a single line telephone, only manual dialing of speed dial memory
locations is allowed.
If the system is a multifunction system, a dial access code (normally "9") is required
when dialing an outside telephone number. If the dial access code is not part of the
stored number, an error code is generated when dialing is attempted and the line key
is released. This occurs only for the first speed dial call. An error tone is not
generated for chain dialing once the call is originated.
If the system is a key function system, a dial access code (normally "9") is not
required.
3 - 54
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Digital Voice Mail
Digital voice mail is part of the InfoSet 408 system. Users can leave messages for
other system users. The large LED on the telephone lights solid red to indicate the
user has a message waiting.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones (single
line telephones users can only leave a message).
Feature Operation
Refer to the manuals accompanying voice mail.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
206
Extension Number Assignment
N
Special Conditions
Extension numbers 50 and 51 are used as the voice mail extension numbers. The
primary extension is 50. All calls ring at the primary extension unless it is busy. If
extension 50 is busy, then the system automatically routes the calls to extension 51.
The user always dials 50 to access voice mail.
Message waiting can only be set or canceled using the voice mail system.
The message waiting status is retained in system memory by the backup battery.
All programming for voice mail is done using the telephone.
A maximum of 20 subscribers are supported.
A maximum of 20 call routing boxes and one key call routing box are supported.
The system recording capacity is two hours.
A maximum of 20 message groups are supported.
When users call the voice mail extension, they are automatically routed to their mail
box (auto subscriber login).
System Manual
3 - 55
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Delayed Ringing
Delayed Ringing allows some telephones to ring immediately for incoming calls and
other telephones to ring after a programmed delay.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Assigned in system programming.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
124
External Speaker Ringing for Day Mode
N
125
External Speaker Ringing for Night Mode
N
301~304
Day Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4
Y
311~314
Night Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4
N
Special Conditions
Delayed ringing can be assigned different values for day and night modes.
Multiline telephones that are not assigned to ring can still answer calls.
The external line key flashes immediately when calls are received. This setting is
independent of ringing and occurs whether ringing is enabled or disabled for the
telephone.
3 - 56
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Direct Inward Termination
Direct Inward Termination (DIT) allows external lines to be programmed to ring
directly at a specified extension. A separate night ringing DIT assignment is available.
This feature is primarily used for voice mail automated attendant.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
Direct Calling for Day Mode on Trunk Lines 1~4
140~143
Y
(DIT Assignment)
Direct Calling for Night Mode on Trunk Lines 1~4
144~147
Y
(DIT Assignment)
Direct Calling Answer Delay Time
148
Y
(DIT Assignment)
Direct Calling Answer Delay for Night Mode
149
Y
(DIT Assignment)
206
Extension Number Assignment
Y
Special Conditions
DIT transfers or forwarded calls are handled as if they are internal incoming calls.
When DIT is assigned, the system checks if call forwarding is enabled or disabled.
After the DIT answer delay duration timer expires, the call is forwarded if call
forwarding is enabled.
Normally, DIT calls will be transferred to the voice mail system. Extensions other than
the voice mail extension, can only receive one transferred call.
The transferred extension number follows forwarding set for extension hunting.
If an incoming call fails to be transferred, the system waits for an available internal
line.
System Manual
3 - 57
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Direct Paging Access
This feature allows a user to assign a key on the telephone to directly access the
paging function.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Assigning a key for paging:
1.
Press
(InfoSet telephones) or (Electra Elite telephones).
2.
Press
(one-touch key where direct paging access assigned).
3.
Dial
.
4.
If assigning a name that will be displayed in the telephone LCD when the
one-touch key is pressed, press
and enter the alphanumeric characters
using the dialpad. (Refer to Character Registration on page 3-44 and Table 3-2
Dial Pad Keys Used When Entering Names on page 3-45.)
5.
Press
.
Assigning a key for answering a page:
1.
Press
(InfoSet telephones) or (Electra Elite telephones).
2.
Press
(one-touch key where direct paging access assigned).
3.
Dial
.
4.
If assigning a name that will be displayed in the telephone LCD when the
one-touch key is pressed, press
and enter the alphanumeric characters
using the dialpad. (Refer to Character Registration on page 3-44 and Table 3-2
Dial Pad Keys Used When Entering Names on page 3-45.)
5.
Press
.
To page using one-touch key:
1.
Press or lift the handset.
2.
Press
(one-touch key assigned for paging).
3.
Make the paging announcement.
3 - 58
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Special Conditions
Internal and/or external paging is accomplished by using the appropriate one-touch/
feature access key assigned as the paging key.
The paging access codes include:
70
Internal Page
74
Page Answer
75
External Page
77
Internal/External Page (provides both internal and external paging)
The maximum number of digits that can be dialed for an internal line, assigned to a
one-touch/feature access key, is 16 digits.
When multiple paging calls are made in system, the system processes internal pages
first and then processes the external pages.
System Manual
3 - 59
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Direct Station Selection
The Direct Station Selection (DSS) feature allows users to assign internal telephone
numbers to one-touch/feature access keys allowing them to make calls by pressing
one key.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Programming extension 12 to a one-touch key:
1.
Press
while the telephone is in the idle condition.
2.
Press
(for InfoSet telephones) or (for Electra Elite telephones).
3.
Press
(one-touch/feature access key).
4.
Dial (internal
access
code).
5.
Dial
.
6.
Press
.
Making a call using the one-touch key:
Press the programmed one-touch key on your telephone. If programmed, you may
hear a tone, otherwise, announce the call when the party answers. (You can remain
on the speakerphone or lift the handset when the call is answered.)
Verifying the information stored in a one-touch key:
1.
Press
while the telephone is in the idle condition.
2.
Press
(one-touch/feature access key).
Deleting information stored on a one-touch key:
1.
Press
while the telephone is in the idle condition.
2.
Press
(for InfoSet telephones) or (for Electra Elite telephones).
3.
Press
(one-touch/feature access key).
4.
Press
.
3 - 60
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
001-1
Internal Call Notification
N
Special Conditions
If a called telephone is busy, a call waiting tone is returned to the telephone that
originated the call.
A one-touch key that is programmed for DSS also serves as a busy lamp field (BLF).
The BLF provides visual indication of the status of the telephone.
Most single line telephones are not equipped with one-touch/feature access keys.
However, it is possible to call a single line telephone using one-touch/feature access
keys on a multiline telephone.
If an invalid extension number is assigned to a one-touch key, "ERROR" is displayed
in the telephone LCD when the one-touch/feature access key is pressed.
System Manual
3 - 61
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Distinctive Ringing
This feature allows users to assign different ringing patterns to internal and external
calls to easily identify the type of call they are receiving.
This feature is available for the InfoSet or Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
119
Ring Tone Type
Y
361~364
Ringing Cycle for Trunk Lines 1~4
Y
Special Conditions
When ringing is specified for individual speed dial numbers, the specifications
assigned to speed dialing take precedence over the ring tone type programmed.
Users can specify ring tone type for each external line or each multiline telephone
using system programming.
When a number is stored in a speed dial memory location a distinctive, ring tone can
be assigned to that number. If that number rings into the system and can be identified
by Caller ID, then the distinctive ring tone that was stored for that speed dial number
is used.
3 - 62
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Door Lock Release
While the multiline telephone user is talking with the doorphone user, the telephone
user can unlock the door by entering a code assigned for door lock release.
For this feature to be available, the DPH-B10 ETU must be installed in the
system.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
To unlock the door with a call in progress:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
210
Doorphone 1 Tone for Day Mode
Y
211
Doorphone 2 Tone for Day Mode
Y
213
Doorphone 1 Tone for Night Mode
Y
214
Doorphone 2 Tone for Night Mode
Y
501
Doorphone Call Timer
N
Special Conditions
This feature is only enabled when a call is in progress using a doorphone.
The doorphone relay cannot be activated from a single line telephone.
Doorphone 1 operates with release relay 1 and doorphone 2 operates with release
relay 2.
The specified relay (doorphone 1 or 2) is held for five seconds during door lock
release processing. The timer (five seconds) is restarted when the door lock release
code is dialed while the door lock release relay is active.
System Manual
3 - 63
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Door/Monitor Telephone
Two doorphones can be installed in the system to provide 2-way communication with
a location such as a front door area or to monitor a room. The DPH-B10 ETU must be
installed in the key system to provide for this feature. When the doorphone unit is
used as a doorphone, multiline telephones are assigned to ring when the doorphone
key is pressed. When the doorphone is used as a room monitor any telephone can
be used to access the doorphone and monitor the area.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and single
line telephones.
Feature Operation
Answering a doorphone call from a multiline telephone that receives doorphone
ringing tone:
1.
Lift the handset or press .
2.
Talk with the calling party.
Answering a doorphone call from a a multiline telephone that does not receive
doorphone ringing tone:
1.
Lift the handset or press .
2.
Dial .
3.
Dial (to access doorphone 1) or
(to access doorphone 2).
4.
Talk with the calling party.
Monitoring an area:
1.
Lift the handset or press .
2.
Dial .
3.
Dial (to access doorphone 1) or
(to access doorphone 2).
4.
Monitor the area.
3 - 64
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
210
Doorphone 1 Tone for Day Mode
Y
211
Doorphone 2 Tone for Day Mode
Y
213
Doorphone 1 Tone for Night Mode
Y
214
Doorphone 2 Tone for Night Mode
Y
501
Doorphone Call Timer
N
Special Conditions
A maximum of two doorphones can be installed in the system.
Only one doorphone call is allowed at a time because the doorphone unit has only
one communication path.
When an incoming doorphone call is in progress, only monitoring for answering
incoming external calls is allowed.
There is 2-way communication between a doorphone and a telephone.
All multiline telephones and single line telephones can be programmed to ring on
incoming doorphone calls and can answer incoming calls originating from the
doorphone by lifting the handset.
System Manual
3 - 65
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Do Not Disturb (DND)
This feature is used to temporarily eliminate all audible incoming call signals to the
user's telephone. Visual indications to the telephone display and LEDs continue.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Setting/canceling Do Not Disturb:
1.
While the telephone is idle, press
.
2.
Dial
(access code).
3.
Press
.
Special Conditions
Automatic Callback, Hold With Recall (Exclusive and Non-exclusive) and Timed
Alarm features are enabled even in DND mode.
Tone override cannot be sent to a telephone that is in DND mode.
The
LED flashes red when the telephone is in DND mode. If the DND enable/
disable access code (
) is assigned to a one-touch key equipped with and
LED, the one-touch key LED lights solid red to indicate DND mode.
Any busy lamp field (BLF), associated with a telephone that is in DND mode, flashes
red.
If DND mode is being set at the same time an incoming call rings into the telephone,
ringing for that call continues. Ringing for subsequent incoming calls is suppressed.
Background music is available during DND mode.
Automatic callback cannot be set to a telephone that is in DND mode. However, a
telephone in DND mode can set automatic callback to other telephones.
Extensions 10 and 11 can reset DND mode system-wide.
3 - 66
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
DP to DTMF Switching
This feature allows a telephone to be switched from dial pulse (rotary) dialing to dual
tone multifrequency dialing (touchtone). DTMF dialing is required for operations such
as data transmission and communicating with a computer.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones. It is also
available for single line telephones that are connected to a dial pulse line.
Feature Operation
Switching from a dial pulse dialing to a dual tone multifrequency dialing:
1.
Press while a call is in progress.
2.
Dial the desired number. The digits are transmitted using dual tone
multifrequency signaling.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
109
Trunk Line Dialing Type
Y
110
Touchtone Signal Duration and Pause Interval
N
Special Conditions
If
is pressed while a call is in progress, DP dialing is not available.
This feature is only supported for push button telephones.
If any digit other than # is pressed after , the call does not switch to DTMF mode.
An external line that has been switched to DTMF mode is returned to DP mode when
the user hangs up.
When DTMF mode is selected while an external call is in progress, subsequent
dialing is transmitted in DTMF mode.
System Manual
3 - 67
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
DTMF switching operation can be assigned to a speed dial memory location. When
assigning DTMF switching to a speed dial memory location, it may be necessary to
add a pause to the dialing string. This pause allows the called party to respond and
establish the call before DTMF digits are sent.
After switching to DTMF mode, DP mode can be restored by pressing
(for
InfoSet telephones) or(for Electra Elite telephones).
3 - 68
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Extension Hunting
This feature allows internal calls to be distributed to other telephones when the called
telephone is busy. Telephones can be grouped together into hunt groups. A primary
hunt number (hunt group pilot number) is assigned to a hunt group. When calls are
received and the called telephone is busy, the system automatically tries a second
telephone, third telephone and so forth until an idle telephone is found. This feature is
primarily used for voice mail extensions. Voice mail extensions are assigned to a
voice mail hunt group.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Calling an extension in a hunt group:
1.
Lift the handset or press . (Internal dialtone must be heard.)
2.
Dial the desired extension number.
3.
Talk when the call is answered.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
019-1
Hunt Group Pilot Number 10
Y
019-2
Hunt Group Pilot Number 20
Y
019-3
Hunt Group Pilot Number 30
Y
019-4
Hunt Group Pilot Number 40
Y
019-5
Hunt Group Pilot Number 50
Y
206
Extension Number Assignment
Y
System Manual
3 - 69
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Special Conditions
Each of the five hunt groups are assigned a hunt group pilot number (10, 20, 30, 40,
or 50). Telephones are grouped together and assigned to one of the hunt groups.
The extension numbers in each hunt group must be assigned consecutive extension
numbers. For example, extensions in hunt group 10 are assigned numbers 10~19.
Hunt groups can be assigned independently of tenant groups.
When a telephone in the hunt group is set for call forwarding, that telephone is
skipped during extension hunting.
When used with automated attendant or voice mail applications, a hunt group can be
assigned for outside lines to ring into the system. If both voice mail ports are busy,
the first voice mail port to become idle will answer the call.
3 - 70
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Extension Name Assignment
When this feature is used, the name or number of the internal caller or the paging
originator is displayed on the called party (parties) telephone(s). The telephones
must be equipped with an LCD for this feature to be used.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite display telephones.
Feature Operation
Entering a caller's name:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the extension number for the party whose name will be entered.
4.
Enter the name. Refer to Character Registration on page 3-44 and Table 3-2
Dial Pad Keys Used When Entering Names on page 3-45 for instructions for
entering alphanumeric characters.
Note:
A maximum of six alphanumeric characters can be entered for the name.
5.
Press
to save the entry .
Deleting a caller's name:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the extension number associated with the party's name that will be deleted.
4.
Press
to delete the entry .
Special Conditions
The extension number and associated name are displayed during the telephone's
idle condition.
The extension name can be assigned using PC programming.
System Manual
3 - 71
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
External Paging (Meet-Me)
This feature allows paging through a user-provided external speaker. The paged
party answers by dialing a specified access code.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Initiating a page:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the access code for the desired zone or press a one-touch key that has
been programmed with the access code. The external paging access codes
are listed below.
70
Internal All Call Paging
74
External/Internal Meet-Me (Answer Page
75
External Paging
77
All External/Internal Paging
3.
Announce the page.
Answering a page:
1.
Press or lift the handset.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Answer the page.
3 - 72
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
002-2
External Speaker Connection
Y
002-3
External Paging Tone Assignment
Y
Special Conditions
When external paging is originated, a tone burst is heard from the external speaker.
A busy tone is also generated when a user attempts a page and external paging is in
use.
If background music is on or if an outside call is ringing in to the telephone, ringing or
background music is suspended during a paging announcement. Ringing or
background music is resumed after the page is completed.
When a meet-me is in progress and someone dials the meet-me access code, the
page is discontinued and an internal call is established.
If the external speaker connection has not been programmed using Function "002-2
External Speaker Connection" and a page is attempted, a busy tone is generated.
Only one external speaker can be connected to the system.
System Manual
3 - 73
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
External Tone Ringer via External Speaker
A user-provided external speaker can be programmed to ring when incoming calls are
received. Ringing can be individually set for day mode and night mode.
Feature Operation
Answering a call:
1.
Lift the handset or press .
2.
Press the appropriate flashing line key.
3.
Answer the call.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
002-2
External Speaker Connection
Y
124
External Speaker Ringing for Day Mode
Y
125
External Speaker Ringing for Night Mode
Y
Special Conditions
The feature only operates for incoming external calls.
Only one external speaker can be connected to the system.
3 - 74
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Flash Key
If a system is connected to a PBX, it can be programmed to transfer the PBX call to
the system using a flash signal. The duration of the flash signal is assigned in system
programming.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Transferring a PBX call:
1.
Press
(for InfoSet telephones) or(for Electra Elite telephones).
2.
Hang up, the call is transferred.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
006
Hookflash Duration
Y
107
Trunk Line Type
N
Special Conditions
Pressing
(for InfoSet telephones) or (for Electra Elite) telephones
releases the line and then reseizes the line after the hookflash duration expires.
If an external line is outgoing restricted (dialing external numbers is denied) and the
user presses
and then attempts to dial a restricted number, the external line is
dropped and an error tone is generated.
When
is pressed, digits dialed before and after pressing
are stored in
separate redial memory locations. If
is pressed while dialing, the redial memory
location is cleared.
System Manual
3 - 75
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Flexible Line Key
The line keys on the multiline telephones are designed for flexibility of use. Line keys
that are not used to access external lines can be assigned for:
speed dialing
one-touch/feature access key operation for seizing internal of external telephone
lines
dialing access codes that are used to set/cancel features such as microphone on/off
and headset on/off.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
109
Trunk Line Dialing Type
Y
Special Conditions
Line keys 1~4, at system default, are assigned as external line keys. These line keys
can also be assigned for other uses if Function 109 "Trunk Line Dialing Type" is set
to uninstalled.
3 - 76
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Flexible Numbering Plan
This feature allows extension numbers to be changed to meet individual customer's
needs. When the system is first turned on, the system automatically assigns default
extension numbers. As necessary, these settings can be changed in system
programming.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
206
Extension Number Assignment
Y
Special Conditions
The extension numbers range from 10~59 creating the flexible numbering plan.
The system cannot check for duplicate extension numbers. If the same extension
number is assigned to more than one telephone, the telephone attached to the lowest
numbered port (internal line) in the system rings.
System Manual
3 - 77
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Flexible Ringing Assignment
External calls can be programmed to ring at specified telephones or to an external
speaker. Separate day and night ringing assignments can also be specified in
programming.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and single
line telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
124
External Speaker Ringing for Day Mode
Y
125
External Speaker Ringing for Night Mode
Y
301~304
Day Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4
Y
311~314
Night Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4
Y
401~402
Trunk Line Assignment for Tenants 1~2
N
403
Tenant-to-Telephone Assignment
N
Special Conditions
When "No Ring" is assigned to a telephone (using Functions 301~304 Day Ringing
for Trunk Lines 1~4 and 311~314 Night Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4), the audible tone
is silent. However, the large LED flashes to indicate an incoming call.
Trunks that are assigned to a different tenant, from the tenant the telephone is
assigned to, do not provide audible or visual indication of an incoming call.
Direct Inward Termination (DIT) and ringing transferred calls ring directly to the
telephone where the call is transferred. As a result, these calls do not allow flexible
ringing.
If a DIT call or ringing transferred call is received while a page is being announced,
paging stops at the telephone where the call is received.
3 - 78
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Flexible Timeout
Flexible Timeouts are the system defaults for a variety of times selections. These
preset values allow the system to operate without any initial program changes. Many
of these values can be changed in system programming to meet individual user
specifications.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
The flexible timeout table provides a list of the timers that can be programmed in the
system. The timer, the definition and the timer value are provided in the table. The
default timing value is indicated by (D). Some of the timing values are fixed, this
means they cannot be changed. If the timer is fixed and cannot be changed, that is
noted in the Timer/Function column. If the timing values can be changed, the
Function number where the value is programmed is listed in the Timer/Function
column.
Table 3-3
Flexible Timeouts
Timer/Function
Definition
Timing Value
Automatic Callback Time
The length of time allowed for an
30 sec
Selection
automatic callback to occur before the
callback request is automatically
Fixed
canceled.
Automatic Redial Time
Specifies the call time, wait time, and
Call
Waiting Number
Selection
number of attempts for automatic
Time
Time
of Times
redialing.
0 =
5 sec
5 sec
7
005 Automatic Redial Timer
1 =
10 sec 30sec
7 (D)
2 =
15 sec 60 sec
7
3 =
15 sec 90 sec
7
Automatic Release
The signal detection time for releasing
0 = Not Detected
5 = 250 ms
Disconnection Signal Detection an external (CO/PBX) line when a
1 = 50 ms
6 = 300 ms
Time Selection
disconnect signal is received from a
2 = 100 ms
7 = 350 ms (D)
distant CO/PBX system.
3 = 150 ms
8 = 400 ms
007 Disconnect Detection
4 = 200 ms
9 = 500 ms
Duration
Bounce Protect Time Selection
Specifies the length of time before a
0 = 0 ms
2 = 600 ms
valid hookflash can be detected from a
1 = 300 ms (D)
3 = 900 ms
502 Single LIne Telephone
single line telephone.
Bounce Time
Call Forward Busy/No Answer The length of time before incoming calls 0 = 10 sec (D)
3 = 25 sec
Timer Selection
are forwarded to another telephone
1 = 15 sec
4 = 30 sec
when there is no answer at the original
2 = 20 sec
5 = 60 sec
008 Call Forward No
destination.
Answer Duration
System Manual
3 - 79
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 3-3
Flexible Timeouts (Continued)
Timer/Function
Definition
Timing Value
CO Ring Transfer Recall Timer Specifies the interval from the time a
30 sec
Selection
telephone user transfers an incoming
call until the time the destination
Fixed
telephone user does not respond. When
there is no response, the timer expires
and an alarm is generated at the
transferring user's telephone.
CO/PBX DTMF Duration/
Specifies the tone duration and interdigit 0 = Duration 400ms / Pause 100ms
Interdigit Assignment
time when DTMF signaling is used.
1 = Duration 100ms / Pause 70ms
(D)
110 Touchtone Signal
Duration and Pause Interval
Disconnect Time Selection
The minimum time that must elapse
1 sec
before a disconnected line can be
Fixed
accessed again.
Doorphone Display Time
Specifies the time during which "DPH 1" 0 = 15 sec (D)
Selection
or "DPH 2" is to be displayed on the
1 = 30 sec
telephone LCD. This timer applies to
501 Doorphone Call Timer
incoming calls from a doorphone.
DP Interdigit Time Selection
Specifies the minimum length of the
10pps:650ms/20pps:500ms
pause interval between digits dialed for
Fixed
dial pulse dialing.
DTMF Receiver Release Timer The interval during which a receiver
30 sec
Selection
circuit is connected to a DTMF-type
single line telephone while waiting for
Fixed
digits to be dialed.
Elapsed Call and SMDR Start
Specifies the amount of time that passes 10 sec
Timer Selection
before the call duration and start timer
begins after the number has been
Fixed
dialed.
Exclusive Hold Recall Timer
Specifies the interval before an exclusive 0 = 1 min (D)
3 = 4 min
Selection
hold recall tone is generated. No hold
1 = 2 min
4 = No Limit
alarm is generated if "No Limit" is
2 = 3 min
004 Exclusive Hold Warning
selected.
Tone Timer
Hold Recall Timer Selection
Specifies the interval before a recall tone 0 = 1 min (D)
3 = 4 min
is generated for a holding external (CO/
1 = 2 min
4 = No Limit
003 Hold Warning Tone Timer PBX) call. No hold alarm tone is
2 = 3 min
generated if "No Limit" is selected.
3 - 80
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 3-3
Flexible Timeouts (Continued)
Timer/Function
Definition
Timing Value
Hookflash End Time Selection
Specifies the maximum duration that a
0 = 0 ms
5 = 700 ms (D)
single line telephone has to receive dial 1 = 100 ms
6 = 900 ms
504 Single Line Telephone
tone. The times are added to the
2 = 200 ms
7 = 1.1 sec
Hookflash End Time
Hookflash Start Time. For example, if
3 = 400 ms
8 = 1.3 sec
the Hookflash Start Time (HST) = 1 and 4 = 500 ms
9 = 1.5 sec
the Hookflash End Time (HET) = 1, add
150 ms. and 100 ms. to determine the
maximum duration.
(HST + HET = Max. Hookflash Duration)
Hookflash Start Time Selection
Specifies the minimum hookflash
0 = 100 ms
5 = 450 ms
duration from a single line telephone.
1 = 150 ms
6 = 550 ms
503 Single Line Telephone
2 = 200 ms
7 = 650 ms
Hookflash Start Time
3 = 300 ms (D)
8 = 750 ms
4 = 350 ms
9 = 850 ms
Hookflash Time Selection:
Specifies the break time (the break of
0 = 60 ms
5 = 600 ms (D)
(Multiline Telephone)
the DC loop of a CO/PBX line) sent to
1 = 100 ms
6 = 800 ms
the central office or PBX when the flash 2 = 140 ms
7 = 1.0 sec
006 Hookflash Duration
recall key is pressed.
3 = 200 ms
8 = 1.5 sec
4 = 400 ms
9 = 2.0 sec
Incoming Outside Ringing Delay Specifies time delay that elapses before 0 = 0 sec (D)
4 = 60 sec
Time
ringing sounds for external incoming
1 = 10 sec
5 = No Ring
calls.
3 = 30 sec
301~304 Day Ringing for
Trunk Lines 1~4
311~314 Night Ringing for
Trunk Lines 1~4
Pause Time Selection
Specifies the length of the pause
3 sec
inserted between the digits dialed on
Fixed
external (CO/PBX) lines or when using
speed dialing.
Prepause Time Selection
Specifies the pause time inserted after
1 sec
dial access to an external (PBX trunk)
Fixed
line.
Time Display (12h/24h)
Specifies whether the clock on the
7 = 12 hour (D)
Selection
telephone displays the time in 12-hour
= 24 hour
format (12:00 a.m. to 11:59 p.m.) or
002-7 Time Format for
24-hour format (0:00 to 23:59).
Telephone Display
Trunk Queuing Recall Time
Specifies the interval during which the
10 sec
Selection
telephone that is enabled for queuing is
called. After the timer expires, the
Fixed
queue is automatically canceled.
System Manual
3 - 81
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Full Handsfree Operation
Multiline telephones allows the user to make and answer calls without using the
handset. Users can talk using the telephone's built-in microphone (the microphone
must be turned on).
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Turning the microphone on:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial .
Note:
This operation toggles the microphone on/off. The microphone LED is red if
the microphone is on.
Making an internal call:
1.
Press .
2.
When you hear dialtone, dial
.
3.
When the party answers, begin speaking.
Answering an internal call:
When the call is received, ensure the microphone LED is on and begin talking.
Making an external call:
1.
Press
(line key assigned to seize an external line).
2.
When you hear dialtone, dial the telephone number.
3.
When the party answers, begin speaking.
Answering an external call:
1.
Press
.
2.
When the party answers, ensure that the microphone LED is on, and begin
speaking using the built-in speaker.
3 - 82
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
216
Handsfree Assignment
Y
System Manual
3 - 83
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Handset Microphone Control
When making a call, users can mute the transmission speech path. This allows the
user to continue to hear the other party, but the other party cannot hear their
conversation. Mute is reset (to off) when the call is terminated or it can be manually
reset during a call.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Setting and resetting handset mute:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
(toggles between on/off)
.
Special Conditions
If handset microphone control is set while a call is in progress, it automatically resets
when the user hangs up.
Handset microphone control automatically resets when an internal or external call is
placed on hold.
This feature can be assigned to a one-touch/feature access key. (Refer to
One-Touch/Feature Access Keys User Programmable on page 3-115.)
When the handset microphone control feature is set/reset, one of the following
messages is displayed: Set = Mute On/Reset = Mute Off.
3 - 84
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Handsfree Answerback
This feature allows users of multiline telephones to answer internal voice announced
calls when the microphone is turned on.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Intitating a handsfree answerback:
1.
Press .
2.
Dial the internal extension number. The called party begins talking.
Special Conditions
This feature is enabled regardless of the system setting if the microphone is on.
Handsfree answerback is not possible for an internal voice call unless Dial 1 is
enabled to allow switching between tone/voice signal calls.
Tone override is available during handsfree answerback.
Voice/tone signal calls are controlled by the calling party (intial tone/signal call).
Voice calls can be made from a single line telephone to the key system.
System Manual
3 - 85
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring
A telephone feature which allows the user to place external calls and listen to the
progress of those calls without lifting the handset on the telephone.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Placing an outside call:
1.
Press the line key to access an outside line.
2.
Dial the party's telephone number. When the called party answers you can
either remain off-hook and talk through the telephone speaker or you can lift the
handset.
Placing an internal call:
1.
Press .
2.
Dial the party's extension number. When the called party answers you can
either remain off-hook and talk through the telephone speaker or you can lift the
handset.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
001-6
Trunk Line Direct Access
N
105
Trunk Line Function
N
351~354
Restricting Outgoing Calls for Trunk Lines 1~4
N
401~402
Trunk Line Assignment for Tenants 1~2
N
403
Tenant-to-Telephone Assignment
N
3 - 86
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Headset Connection
A headset can be connected to an Electra Elite multiline telephone. A one-touch/
feature access key must be assigned to toggle the headset on/off.
This feature is only available for Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Assigning headset operation to a one-touch/feature access key:
1.
Press.
2.
Press.
3.
Press (one-touch/feature access key programmed for headset enable/
disable).
Note:
This one-touch/feature access key toggles between the on-hoof/off-hook
operations.
4.
Dial
.
5.
Press.
Placing a call:
1.
Press (one-touch key programmed for headset enable/disable).
2.
Dial the party's telephone number and begin talking when the party answers.
Terminating a call:
Press (one-touch key programmed for headset enable/disable).
Switching to the handset:
1.
Pick up the handset.
2.
Press (one-touch key programmed for headset enable/disable).
System Manual
3 - 87
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
218
Headset Connection
Y
Special Conditions
The headset enable/disable one-touch/feature access key must be used to switch
from on-hook to off-hook.
3 - 88
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Holdfree Transfer
Holdfree Transfers allows users to answer a transferred call without using the hold
key. The system can be programmed to answer the calls by pressing a line key.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Transferring a call:
1.
Lift the handset or press on the telephone where the call is received.
2.
Press
. This is line key on the telephone where the call is received.
3.
The user at the telephone where the call was initially received hangs up.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
002-8
Private Call
Y
Special Conditions
Holdfree transfer is enabled/disabled in system programming.
Trunk queuing using a line key is disabled if holdfree transfer is enabled.
When the user who receives the holdfree transfer presses
(external line key
where the call is received) the extension number where the call transferred from and
the trunk line number is displayed in the LCD of the user receiving the holdfree
transfer (e.g., XX L * XX = Extension Number and * = Trunk Line Number).
If the following conditions occur, the user is not able to pick up the call during a
holdfree transfer, a message is displayed in the LCD indicating the telephone is in use
(e.g., XX In Use XX = Extension Number).
·
A telephone that is the transfer destination has picked up the external line and is
waiting for the user who initially answered the call to hang up.
·
The external line is part of an add-on conference.
System Manual
3 - 89
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Hold with Recall (Exclusive and Non-Exclusive)
When a call is on hold for longer than the preprogrammed interval, the call recalls to
the originating telephone. There are two types of held calls. Exclusive Hold is a held
call that can be picked up only on the telephone where it was placed on hold.
Non-Exclusive Hold is a held call that can be picked up from any telephone in the
system that has access to the line where the call is holding.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Putting a call on Exclusive or Non-Exclusive Hold:
If placing a call on Exclusive Hold, press .
If placing a call on Non-Exclusive Hold, press
, then .
Retrieving a call from exclusive or non-exclusive hold:
Press
(flashing line key).
Placing a single line telephone call on exclusive hold:
Momentarily press the hookswitch to place the call on hold.
Retrieving a single line telephone call from exclusive hold:
Momentarily press the hookswitch to retrieve the call from hold.
3 - 90
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
002-1
Music Source for Music on Hold
N
003
Hold Warning Tone Timer
Y
004
Exclusive Hold Warning Tone Timer
Y
012
Music on Hold Melody
N
Special Conditions
After an external line (exclusive or non-exclusive) is placed on hold, a recall tone is
generated to the telephone that placed the call after a preprogrammed interval has
expired.
The non-exclusive hold recall start timer and exclusive hold recall start timer can be
set independently or each other.
When a hold recall tone is sent to a multiline telephone and a call is holding, the trunk
number associated with the line key is displayed in the telephone LCD.
Telephones that are part of the same tenant group can pick up calls on hold.
The LED of the line key that is placed on hold flashes green indicating the I-Hold
condition. The line key LEDs on other telephones flash red indicating the call is on
hold.
If a telephone is busy, a recall cannot be answered.
If the telephone is not idle when the hold recall timer expires, the hold recall tone is
suppressed until the telephone becomes idle.
After a call is placed on hold, the telephone can seize another external outside line to
make a call or can answer other incoming calls.
Only the telephone used to place a call on exclusive hold can pick up that call.
Outside line key LEDs of telephones that are members of another tenant do not flash
when a call is placed on hold.
System Manual
3 - 91
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
When a call is placed on hold, privacy is released.
When a single line telephone is used to place a call on hold (by pressing the Flash
Key), the handset should remain off of the cradle. If the handset is placed back on
the cradle, a recall tone is immediately generated.
The hold recall timer is specified in system programming using Function "003 Hold
Warning Tone Timer" (default - 1 minute). If "No Limit" is specified for the hold recall
timer, a hold recall tone is not generated.
3 - 92
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Howler Tone Service
Howler tone is provided if a telephone remains off-hook after a call has been
completed or if the user goes off-hook and fails to dial before the preprogrammed time
interval expires.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Special Conditions
Dialtone is sent for 15 seconds before a busy tone is heard. After an additional 20
seconds, a howler tone is heard signaling an off-hook condition.
System Manual
3 - 93
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Icon Display
Some icons are displayed in the LCD of the telephone to indicate certain conditions.
For example, a clock is displayed to indicate an alarm has been set.
This feature is available only for InfoSet telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Special Conditions
The operations that are available for icon display include:
·
Night Mode
·
Call Forward All Calls
·
Clock/Calendar Display (Month)
·
Timed Alarm set
3 - 94
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
I-Hold Indication
This feature provides easy identification of calls that a user has placed on hold. The
system provides two colors to identify the holding calls. On the multiline telephone
where a call originates, the line key LED flashes green. One the other telephones in
the system, the line key LED flashes red.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
003
Hold Warning Tone Timer
N
004
Exclusive Hold Warning Tone Timer
N
101~104
Telephone Number Display for Trunk Lines 1~4
N
401~402
Trunk Line Assignment for Tenants 1~2
N
403
Tenant to Telephone Assignment
N
Special Conditions
The external line LED on telephones that are not members or the tenant will not flash
to indicate I-Hold.
The external line key LED on the transferring telephone remains lighted when a call
is transferred to a telephone that is not a member of the transferring telephone's
tenant.
If an external call is transferred to a telephone that is in a different tenant group and
that telephone picks up the call and places the call on hold, the line key LED on the
telephone that originated the transfer goes off (i.e., the originating telephone no
longer has call appearance for that call).
When a call is placed on exclusive hold, the LED indication for other telephone is solid
red (indicating the telephone busy).
System Manual
3 - 95
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Incoming Call Identification
This features provides identification of incoming calls. If the call is from an internal or
external user, the call is identified by showing the caller's name and extension/
external line number in the telephone display.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones that are
equipped with an LCD.
Feature Operation
Entering an internal extension name:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the extension number.
4.
Enter the name to be associated with the extension. (Refer to Character
Registration on page 3-44 for instructions for entering names.)
5.
Press
.
Deleting an internal extension name:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the extension number.
4.
Press
.
Entering an external line name:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the external line number.
4.
Enter the name to be associated with the telephone number. (Refer to
Character Registration on page 3-44 for instructions for entering names.)
5.
Press
.
3 - 96
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Deleting an external line name:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the external line number.
4.
Press
.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
101~104
Telephone Number Display for Trunk Lines 1~4
N
206
Extension Number Assignment
N
401~402
Trunk Line Assignment for Tenants 1~2
N
Special Conditions
The name can be displayed on the telephone LCD during the idle condition.
The telephone display shows incoming call identification information as follows:
In this example, extension 10 is calling extension 11.
Before a telephone name can be displayed it must be programmed into the system
by the user. The name can be a maximum of six alphanumeric characters.
The name display takes precedence over the transferred call indication during a
transferred call. The name disappears from the display when the transferred call is
answered.
The name display for an automatic transferred call takes precedence over the
transferred call indication when the transferred call is completed. The call time is
reached five seconds after the call is answered and the name disappears.
During a conference call, only the extension number is displayed even if the name
has been programmed into the system.
A maximum of three extension numbers can be displayed during a conference
add-on. If an extension is placed on hold during an conference add-on, the holding
party's display changes from [XX] to <XX> on the LCD of the held party (XX =
Extension Number).
System Manual
3 - 97
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Internal Recall
When hearing a busy tone or error tone, users can capture dialtone for internal calls
by pressing a specified key on multiline telephones or by pressing hookswitch on
single line telephones.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and single
line telephones.
Feature Operation
Capturing dialtone:
After hearing a busy or error tone, press
(for InfoSet telephones) or (for
Electra Elite telephones), or hookswitch (single line telephone). Internal dialtone is
provided.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
001-9
Single Line Telephone Hookflash Assignment
N
Special Conditions
Internal recall is enabled in the following situations:
·
System is waiting for the second digit of an internal extension number to be
dialed.
·
Busy signal is received when placing an external call.
If a single line telephone has been programmed to seize an external line when going
off-hook, the user must perform a hookflash to access internal dialtone.
3 - 98
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling
In system programming, internal calls can be assigned to signal an incoming call by
either ringing or voice announcement. The caller can override the system setting for
individual calls by dialing
(access code).
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Making a call when the system is programmed for voice/tone signaling:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
When you hear internal dialtone, dial the desired extension number.
3.
When you hear the tone, voice announce the call or dial to provide ringing.
4.
The called party can reply handsfree if the call is voice announced. If the call
provides ringing, the called party answers by lifting the handset or by pressing
.
Making a call when the system is programmed for tone/voice signaling:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
When you hear internal dialtone, dial the desired extension number.
3.
The called party's telephone rings. If you wish to voice announce the call, dial
.
4.
The called party can reply handsfree if the call is voice announced. If the call
provides ringing, the called party answers by lifting the handset or by pressing
.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
001-1
Internal Call Notification
Y
System Manual
3 - 99
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Special Conditions
Users can toggle between voice/tone by dialing
while a call is in progress.
A single line telephone can be used to make voice announcements to multiline
telephone users.
A one-touch key can be programmed to switch between voice and tone. A one-touch
key can be programmed to dial the desired extension number and the access code
(
).
Voice or tone signaling is assigned system-wide using system programming.
Voice announcement is the system default setting.
The telephone microphone must be activated for handsfree answer when telephone
receives a voice announced call.
Users cannot voice announce to single line telephones.
Switching between voice announcement and tone signaling is disabled when calling
a single line telephone.
Tone override is disabled during an incoming voice call.
The call can only be switched between voice/tone using the multiline telephone
originating the call.
3 - 100
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
I-Use Indication
This feature provides indications about the line that is in use by illuminating the green
LED associated with the line key. Busy lines are illuminated in red, this allows the
user to quickly identify those lines that are in use.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
206
Extension Number Assignment
N
209
Outgoing Call Priority Mode
N
301~304
Day Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4
N
311~314
Night Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4
N
401~402
Trunk to Tenant Assignment Tenants 1~2
N
Special Conditions
If an external call is transferred to an extension that is a member of another tenant
group, LED indication is provided. For all other types of calls, no LED indication is
provided to extensions that are members of a different tenant group.
A solid green LED indicates the I-Use condition on the telephone with a call in
progress. Other telephones in the system display a red LED to indicate the line is in
use.
I-Hold condition is indicated by a flashing green LED.
System Manual
3 - 101
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Key Function/Multifunction Registration
The system can be registered as a Key Function (KF) or a Multifunction (MF)
telephone system using system programming.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
009
Outgoing Call Line Selection
Y
209
Outgoing Call Priority Mode
N
331~334
Automatic Line Selection for Trunk Lines 1~4
N
Special Conditions
When a system is set to KF, the external line key must be pressed to access the
external line. External calls cannot be made from internal dialtone using a trunk
access code (
). Calls can be made from internal dialtone if a specified trunk
access code is dialed first ( + X ) (X = Trunk Number 1~4).
When the system is set to multifunction, external lines can be accessed from internal
dialtone by dialing the trunk access code (
).
When the system is set to KF, the following external calls are prohibited:
·
Prime Line with Automatic Trunk Selection
·
Speed Dial with Automatic Trunk Selection
·
Last Number Redial with Automatic Trunk Selection
Key function or multifunction selection is made in system programming using
Function "009 Outgoing Call Line Selection".
In KF mode, single line telephones can be used for internal calls and can access
external lines using the trunk access code (
).
3 - 102
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Manual Line Seizure
An outside line can be accessed by pressing a line key.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Manually accessing an outside line:
1.
Press
(external line key). The LED lights and dialtone is heard.
2.
Remain on the speakerphone or lift the handset.
Special Conditions
An error is displayed in the telephone LCD when the user presses a line key that
cannot seize an external line (e.g., the external line is a member of another tenant).
The line key LED on the telephone that seizes the line lights green, all other telephone
LEDs light red.
When manual line seizure is attempted by more than one telephone user
simultaneously, the line key LED on the first telephone to select the external line lights
green. The other telephones receive the message "IN USE" in the telephone LCD.
System Manual
3 - 103
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Manual Pause
This feature allows users to insert a pause while dialing a telephone number. The
pause can also be programmed on a one-touch/feature access key or can be inserted
by dialing an access code.
This feature it available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Inserting a pause:
1.
Lift the handset or press .
2.
Press
.
3.
Dial
. The pause is inserted.
Assigning a one-touch key to manually insert a pause:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
( for Electra Elite telephones).
3.
Press
(line key to be programmed as the one-touch/feature access key).
4.
Press
.
5.
Press
.
Special Conditions
Call restriction is not checked for a pause.
Manual pauses are stored in the last number redial memory location and can be
stored in speed dial memory locations.
3 - 104
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Message Waiting Indication for Voice Mail
When a user has a voice message, the large LED lights solid red. This provides
distinctive indication that there is a message waiting.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite telephones.
Feature Operation
To respond to a voice mail message indication:
1.
Call the extension number for voice mail.
2.
After the voice mail system answers, follow the prompts to retrieve messages.
Special Conditions
Only the voice mail system can set or cancel the message waiting indication.
Message waiting status is retained by the system memory backup battery.
System Manual
3 - 105
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Microphone Control
The microphone can be turned on and off and the on/off status is indicated on the
multiline telephone. A one-touch key can be programmed for microphone control or
an access code can be dialed to mute the microphone for privacy during incoming
voice announced calls and during calls that use the built-in speaker phone.
This feature is available for InfoSet or Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Using a one-touch key to turn the microphone on/off:
Press the one-touch key programmed to control the microphone. The microphone
toggles on and off.
Using an access code to turn the microphone on/off:
Press . . The microphone toggles on and off.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
216
Handsfree Assignment
N
Special Conditions
When the system is initially powered up, all microphones are turned on. If the system
loses power or is turned off and then on, the microphones retain the on/off status that
was set before the power loss.
When calling another telephone within the system, the user's voice is heard through
the speaker at the called telephone.
When the microphone is on, the MIC LED lights red. When the microphone is off, the
MIC LED is off.
A telephone that is disabled for handsfree speakerphone operation can still use the
speakerphone for internal voice announcements.
If the handsfree option is not turned on when is pressed, the speakerphone
operation will not function.
3 - 106
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Music on Hold
Music can be provided to caller's on hold using the system's internal music source or
by connecting an external music source (user-provided) such as a radio, tape player,
or compact disc.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
002-1
Music Source for Music on Hold
N
012
Music on Hold Melody
N
Special Conditions
The external music on hold and background music share the same input source on
the KSU.
Music on hold can be generated in internal an external calls that are placed on hold.
The music on hold source can be selected from the internal or external music on hold
source, which is connected to external hold tone/background music on the KSU.
When using external music on hold, the music source (e.g., tape deck, radio, CD)
must be connected to the system. Music is not generated if the external music on
hold is specified but the external music source has not been connected.
System Manual
3 - 107
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Nesting Dial
This feature allows speed dial buffer numbers (either system or individual) to be
nested or chained into another buffer, allowing numbers to be dialed consecutively by
simply pressing one button.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones. Note that the single line telephones cannot be used to
program nesting dial, but they can use the nesting dial feature.
Feature Operation
Programming nested dialing
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
.
3.
Dial the speed dial memory location number where the other speed dial memory
location numbers will be stored (
~
or
~
).
4.
Press
.
5.
Dial the speed dial memory location number(s) that will be nested or chain
dialed (
~ or
~
). (Repeat
steps 4 and 5 for each memory location number to be nested.)
6.
Press
and enter a name if desired. (Refer to Character Registration on
page 3-44 for instructions about entering names.)
7.
Press
.
Using nested dialing:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial the speed dial memory location number where the other memory location
numbers that will be consecutively dialed are stored (
~ or
~
).
The system automatically dials the numbers that were stored in each of the
memory locations.
3 - 108
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Confirming the buffers stored in a nested dialing memory location:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
.
3.
Dial the speed dial buffer number where the other buffers numbers ( ~
or ~
) that will be consecutively dialed
are stored.
The system displays the buffers numbers that were stored in the nested
dialing buffer.
4.
Press
to scroll to the next page if necessary.
Deleting a nested speed dial memory location:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
.
3.
Dial the speed dial buffer number where the other buffers numbers ( ~
or
~
) that will be consecutively dialed
are stored .
4.
Press
.
Deleting a system speed dial memory location and associated name:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
.
3.
Dial the speed dial buffer number where the other buffers numbers (
~
or
~
) that will be consecutively dialed
are stored .
4.
Press
.
5.
Press
.
System Manual
3 - 109
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
001-2
Speed Dial Assignment
N
Special Conditions
A maximum of five speed dial memories can be nested. If a sixth speed dial memory
location is attempted to be nested, "ERROR" is displayed in the telephone LCD.
A speed dial memory cannot be nested into itself.
A speed dial memory with nested numbers cannot be nested in another speed dial
memory location.
Station speed dial memory locations cannot be nested into system speed dial
memory locations.
If a call is originated using speed dialing and the memory location is empty, the
following message is displayed in the telephone LCD: XX: Empty (XX = Memory
Location Number).
If a call is originated with a speed dial number that has more than three nested speed
dial memory locations, only the first three memory locations are displayed in the
telephone LCD.
If a call is originated with a speed dial number that has a "name" associated with it,
the "name " is displayed in the telephone LCD. The clock display is restored when
the external party answers the call.
If a system is programmed to allow both central office and PBX lines and a call is
originated using a speed dial number for which no PBX access code is included in the
dialing string, the external line is released and "ERROR" is displayed in the telephone
LCD.
A maximum of 24 digits can be programmed in a speed dial memory. A nesting dial
is counted as three digits in the 80 system speed dial mode and four digits in the 200
system speed dial mode.
Speed dialing can be used after manually dialing the number for multiline telephones.
This cannot be done for single line telephones.
Nested speed dial numbers cannot be programmed from a single line telephone.
However, speed dial calls can be made from a single line telephone.
3 - 110
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Night Mode
All telephones in the system can be placed into or out of night mode. This provides
changes in the ringing assignment for central office and PBX lines and direct inward
termination (DIT) assignments. This mode is set on a system-wide basis.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Refer to Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching on page 3-10 for instructions for
automatically switching between day/night modes.
Feature Operation
Manually setting night mode:
1.
Press
while the telephone is in the idle condition.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Press
.
Assigning a one-touch key to set night mode:
1.
Press
while the telephone is in the idle condition.
2.
Press
.
3.
Press
(the one-touch key to be assigned for night mode).
4.
Dial
.
5.
Press
to enter an associated name. (Refer to Character Registration on
page 3-44 for instructions about assigning a name.)
6.
Press
.
System Manual
3 - 111
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
124
External Speaker Ringing for Day Mode
N
125
External Speaker Ringing for Night Mode
N
Direct Calling for Day Mode on Trunk Lines 1~4 (DIT
140~143
N
Assignment)
Direct Calling for Night Mode on Trunk Lines 1~4 (DIT
144~147
N
Assignment)
148
Direct Calling Answer Delay Time (DIT Answer Delay)
N
149
Direct Calling Delay for Night Mode (DIT Answer Delay)
N
210~211
Doorphones 1~2 Tone for Day Mode
N
213~214
Doorphones 1~2 Tone for Night Mode
N
301~304
Day Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4
Y
311~314
Night Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4
Y
Special Conditions
Ringing is not generated for incoming calls from another tenant group regardless of
the settings.
Multiline telephones without ringing remain silent. However, the external line key
LED flashes red.
Ringing can be assigned to each multiline and single line telephone for both day
mode and night mode.
All telephones can be assigned to ring on incoming calls on all lines for both night
mode and day mode.
When the system switches to night mode, the telephone display switches to:
·
Night (InfoSet telephones)
·
(Electra Elite telephones - displayed on the left side of the clock)
3 - 112
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Night mode toggles on and off when the manual switching operation is performed.
Day/Night mode switching affects the following functions:
·
Incoming Call Identification (assigned using Functions "301~304 Day Ringing
for Trunk Lines 1~4" and "311~314 Night Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4")
·
External Ring Control (assigned using Functions "124 External Speaker
Ringing for Day Mode" and "125 External Speaker Ringing for Night Mode")
·
Doorphone Ring Assignment (assigned using Functions "210~211
Doorphones 1~2 for Day Mode" and "213~214 Doorphones 1~2 for Night
Mode")
System Manual
3 - 113
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Off-Hook Ringing
If a user is currently on a call and receives another external call, off-hook ringing is
provided to the telephone's external speaker. Off-hook Ringing is at a lower volume
than normal on-hook ringing.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
202
Off-Hook Ringing Tone
N
Special Conditions
Off-hook ringng is only enabled for external lines that have incoming external ringing
specified.
Off-hook ringing volume can be adjusted.
A multiline telephone that is using the speakerphone or is set for do not disturb does
not receive off-hook ringing tone.
A doorphone can generate off-hook ringing tone.
Off-hook ringing can be generated during a call where the headset is used (headset
is only available for Electra Elite telephones).
3 - 114
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
One-Touch/Feature Access Keys User Programmable
Multiline telephone users can press a single key that has been programmed for
functions such as speed dialing, extension numbers, access codes, etc. By using the
one-touch key the user does not need to go off-hook, they simply press the
programmed key and the system seizes a line and dials the number.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Programming a one-touch/feature access key:
1.
Press
while the telephone is in the idle condition.
2.
Press
(for InfoSet telephones) or(for Electra Elite telephones).
3.
Press
(one-touch/feature access key).
Note:
This must be line key that not being used to seize an external line or has
already been assigned as a one-touch/feature access key.
4.
Enter the appropriate "dial operation code" (i.e., ,
, ,
, or ).
These dial operation codes indicate to the system which operation is being
stored under the one-touch key. For example, if is entered then the system
expects a CO/PBX number of 24 digits (maximum) to be entered. The following
tables list each dial operation code, a description of the operation, the maximum
number of digits that can be entered for the number being stored, and the valid
number/special "codes" that can be stored for each number.
Dial
Dial Operation
Maximum
Operation
Valid Entry Keys
Description
Digits
Code
0 ~ 9, , #
CO/PBX Telephone
or = Pause
24
Number
or = Hookflash
= Nesting Dial
Feature Access
#
16
0 ~ 9, , #
Number
0
Speed Dial Number
15
0 ~ 9, , #
Extension Number/
1
16
0 ~ 9, , #
Internal Dial No.
System Manual
3 - 115
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Dial
Dial Operation
Maximum
Operation
Valid Entry Keys
Description
Digits
Code
Special Feature
2
2
0 ~ 9, , #
Number
5.
Enter the appropriate telephone number, speed dial memory location number,
extension number, special dial number, or feature access code.
6.
Press
and enter the associated "name" (alphabetic characters). (Refer to
Character Registration on page 3-44 for instructions about entering
alphanumeric characters.)
7.
Press
.
Using the one-touch/feature access key for speed dialing:
1.
Press
(CO/PBX line key to seize an external line).
2.
Press
(one-touch /feature access key where the speed dial number is
stored).
3.
Remain on the speakerphone or lift the handset to talk when the called party
answers.
- OR -
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(one-touch/feature access key). The stored data is displayed in
the telephone LCD.
3.
Press
(CO/PBX line key to seize an external line).
4.
Remain on the speakerphone or lift the handset to talk when the called party
answers.
Confirming data stored under a one-touch/feature access key:
1.
Press
.
1.
Press
(one-touch/feature access where the data is stored). If data has
been stored for the one-touch/feature access key it is displayed in the telephone
LCD. If no data has been stored, "ERROR" is displayed in the telephone LCD.
3 - 116
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Deleting data stored under a one-touch/feature access key:
1.
Press
while the telephone is in the idle condition.
2.
Press
(for InfoSet telephones) or(for Electra Elite telephones).
3.
Press
(one-touch/feature access key).
4.
Press
.
Deleting the "name" associated with a one-touch/feature access key:
1.
Press
while the telephone is in the idle condition.
2.
Press
(for InfoSet telephones) or (for Electra Elite telephones).
3.
Press
(one-touch/feature access key).
4.
Press
to delete the alphanumeric "name" associated with the one-touch/
feature access key.
5.
Press
.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
001-2
Speed Dial Assignment
N
001-7
One-Touch Key Direct Access for Outgoing Calls
N
001-8
One-Touch Key Duplication Assignment
N
009
Outgoing Call Line Selection
N
107
Trunk Line Type
N
109
Trunk Line Dialing Type
N
System Manual
3 - 117
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Special Conditions
Any unused line keys can be assigned as one-touch/feature access keys.
When deleting one-touch/feature access key information, the dialing information and
the associated "name" (if assigned) must be deleted in separate operations.
If CO and PBX lines are assigned, the call cannot be completed unless the PBX
access code is stored under the one-touch/feature access key as part of the dialing
string.
If duplicate information is stored under more than one one-touch/feature access key,
the information that was previously stored is erased and the current information is
stored.
If the number of speed dial memory locations is changed using "001-2 Speed Dial
Assignment", all data that is stored under one-touch/feature access keys is deleted.
3 - 118
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
PC Programming
Users can program the key system using a PC. A PC is connected to the key system
using an RS-232C cable which allows the system parameters to be downloaded to
the PC and then modified. Once modified, the system parameters are then uploaded
to the key system.
An MIF-B10 ETU must be installed in the system for this feature to operate.
The minimum requirements for the PC to run this program include:
100 MHz Pentium processor
16 MB RAM
10 MB hard disk space
640 x 480 monitor resolution
Window 95/98
Internet Explorer 4.1
Netscape Communicator 4.7
The recommended requirements for running PC Programming include:
166 MHz Pentium processor
64 MB RAM
10 MB hard disk space
1024 x 768 monitor resolution
Windows 95/98
Feature Operation
Refer to Chapter 7 PC Programming for operational instructions.
Special Conditions
The PC port is used for both SMDR print output and PC programming. The system
must be in PC programming mode before connecting a PC to the system. This is
accomplished by dialing
from either extension 10 or 11. (Note that
this access code is used to toggle between the SMDR print output mode and PC
programming mode.) The mode is displayed in the telephone LCD for five seconds
allowing the user to verify that the desired mode has been properly set.
System Manual
3 - 119
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
When system data is uploaded from the PC to the KSU, the KSU is updated with the
data from PC programming. During the upload process, data is temporarily stored in
a "working" memory area if any of the telephones are in-use. Once the system is idle,
the data is updated in system memory.
The baud rate between the MIF ETU and the PC is fixed at 19,200 bps and the Start/
Stop bit is set to 1.
All user programmable assignments such as one-touch keys and speed dialing can
also be assigned using PC programming.
3 - 120
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Power Failure Transfer
Power Failure Transfer ensures that a customer has access to the telephone
company's central office network during a power outage. When system power is lost
and power supplied by the battery backup has expired, the first external telephone
line coming into the system is automatically transferred to the power failure transfer
connection (RJ-11) on the side of the KSU.
This feature is available for use with single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Special Conditions
During a power outage, calls can be made from the single line telephone that is
connected to the power failure transfer (PFT) port (external telephone line 1).
System Manual
3 - 121
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Preset Dialing
This feature allows users to dial a telephone number before actually going off-hook.
The number is displayed in the telephone LCD allowing the user to verify the number
before actually going off-hook. The number is dialed once the user goes off-hook.
This feature is available for InfoSet or Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Dialing:
1.
Before going off-hook, dial the telephone number.
2.
Go off-hook by lifting the handset or pressing
(line key).
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
209
Outgoing Call Priority Mode
N
Special Conditions
A maximum of 24 digits can be entered. If the user attempts to enter more than 24
digits, "ERROR" is displayed in the telephone LCD and preset dialing is canceled.
If function "209 Outgoing Call Priority Mode" is set to Internal Line preference,
preset dialing is only available when a CO line key is pressed; it is not available by
lifting the handset.
Call Restriction is performed after the external line is seized.
After the digit display timer expires (10 seconds), preset dialing is canceled if the user
does not press an available CO line key or lifts the handset.
3 - 122
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Prime Line Assignment
Prime Line Assignment allows a user to go off-hook and make an external call from a
trunk line without pressing a line key. The system is programmed to automatically
select a specified trunk line when the user goes off-hook. Internal calls are made by
pressing , which accesses internal dialtone.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Making an external call:
Lift the handset. The outside line is automatically seized.
Making an internal call:
1.
Press to access internal dialtone.
2.
Remain on the speakerphone or lift the handset and dial the desired extension
number.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
209
Outgoing Call Priority Mode
N
331~334
Automatic Line Selection for Trunk Lines 1~4
N
Special Conditions
At default all telephones are set to seize the first available external line.
If a telephone is assigned to seize an external line, preset dialing is performed after
the user dials the number and then lifts the handset.
System Manual
3 - 123
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
If an external line is assigned for automatic answering (using Functions "341~344
Automatic Answering using Trunks 1~4"), external ringing calls are answered when
the handset is lifted. If the external line is a transferred call, that external line is
answered when the handset is lifted.
The external line is seized after the handset is lifted and the external line key is
pressed.
If the handset is lifted during trunk queuing, the queued external line is seized.
A single line telephone that has been assigned to seize an external line accesses
internal dialtone by pressing hookflash.
3 - 124
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Privacy on all Calls
The system provides complete privacy on all calls. No other telephone user can enter
another's conversation unless that user permits them to enter the conversation by
releasing privacy or by adding them to a conference. The Barge-In feature, if
enabled, overrides privacy on all calls and allows the barge-in user to enter the
conversation.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and single
line telephones.
Feature Operation
Releasing privacy:
Press
while engaged on a call to release privacy.
Connecting to a call that has been released:
Lift the handset and press the line key of the call where privacy has been released.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
002-8
Private Call
Y
Special Conditions
Privacy release cannot occur while dialing. After the called party answers or any
incoming call is answered, privacy can be released.
Privacy release cannot occur if an add-on conference is in progress.
Privacy release cannot be performed if all conference circuits are in use. When all
conference circuits are busy, the
LED lights red.
Only one telephone user can interrupt another's conversation using privacy release.
A maximum of two external lines can have privacy released.
System Manual
3 - 125
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Privacy release can only occur for external lines within the same tenant group. If a
call is transferred to another tenant group, privacy cannot be released.
Privacy on all calls is the default setting when the system is initially installed.
The Barge-In feature can be used to access a telephone line that does not have
privacy released. If Barge-In is enabled in system programming, it overrides the
privacy assignment. [Refer to Barge-In (Interrupting an External Call) on page 3-20.]
Privacy on all calls a can be released by individual users by pressing
while on an external call. If
are pressed again, privacy release is
canceled.
Privacy release is not available for single line telephones.
Privacy for all calls is restored after the external line that has released privacy hangs
up or presses hookflash.
LCD indication for privacy release is the same as the display for an add-on
conference on an external line.
The
LED flashes red on the telephone where privacy is released and lights solid
red on the
LED on the telephone that picks up the line.
A single line telephone can access an external line that has privacy released by
dialing
and the external line number.
3 - 126
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Programmable Pause for Speed Dial
Users can insert a pause when programming speed dial numbers using this feature.
The pause allows a short delay before accessing an external line.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Programming a pause:
While entering a speed dial number, press
(for InfoSet telephones) or(for
Electra Elite telephones). A pause is inserted between digits.
Special Conditions
A pause can be programmed as the first digit of a dialing string.
Pauses cannot be inserted using a single line telephone.
Pauses can be entered when speed dial number are assigned using PC
programming.
A single line telephone can use speed dial numbers that include pauses.
Pauses can be inserted between digits. Consecutive pauses can also be inserted
into a dialing string.
A pause is counted as one digit (speed dial numbers are a maximum or 24 digits).
One pause is equivalent to three seconds (fixed).
System Manual
3 - 127
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Programming from Multiline Telephone
The system can be programmed using a multiline telephone. It is necessary to use a
telephone with an LCD to view the programmable options. Only ports 1 and 2
(normally assigned to extensions 10 and 11) are used for telephone programming.
This feature is applicable for the InfoSet and Electra Elite display telephones.
Feature Operation
Refer to Chapter 6 Telephone Programming.
Special Conditions
"PROGRAMMING DATA" is displayed in the telephone LCD while system data is
being updated.
Only one telephone can be in programming mode at a time.
System data can be programmed while the system is operational.
Background music and room monitoring are disabled when the system is being
programmed.
3 - 128
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Resident System Program
When power is supplied to the system, the system scans the hardware configuration
and assigns default values. This allows for plug-and-play operation of the system.
Once operational, the system can be customized for individual customers.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
109
Trunk Line Dialing Type
N
Special Conditions
If no COI(2)-B10 ETU is installed, line keys 1~2 are assigned as external line keys.
Line keys 1~4 are assigned as external line keys when the expansion COI(2)-B10
ETU is installed.
If there are only two external lines, line keys 3 and 4 can be used as one-touch/feature
access keys. If external lines 3 and 4 are installed at a later time (after they have
been assigned as one-touch/feature access keys), they become external line keys.
At default, external line keys 1~4 (depending on hardware configuration) are
assigned DTMF (touchtone) signaling.
System Manual
3 - 129
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Ringing Line Preference
When using ringing line preference, the user can answer any ringing line on their
multiline telephones by lifting the handset or pressing (it is not necessary to
press the line key first).
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Answering a call at the telephone where Ringing Line Preference is assigned
Lift the handset and talk with the calling party.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
301 ~ 304
Day Ringing for Trunk Lines 1 ~ 4
Y
311~314
Night Ringing for Trunk Lines 1~4
Y
341~344
Automatic Answering using Trunk Lines 1 ~ 4
Y
Special Conditions
Answering incoming calls requires the external line to audibly ring at the telephone
(including single line telephones).
Answering incoming calls by going off-hook is assigned in programming using
Functions "341~344 Automatic Answering using Trunk Lines 1~4".
Ringing line preference calls are answered in the order they are received.
When more than one call rings into the system, they are answered in the following
order:
·
Internal Incoming Call
·
Ringing Transfer Call
·
Incoming External Call
Ringing line preference takes precedence over prime line preference (when it is
assigned).
3 - 130
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Room Monitor Telephone
A telephone can be used to monitor a room (e.g., this could be used to monitor a
baby's room or a children's play area).
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Setting a telephone to be monitored:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Press
.
Note:
This is the telephone that is located in the room to be monitored. You must
perform this procedure from that telephone. This procedure toggles the
operation on and off.
Setting a telephone to monitor:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Press
.
Note:
This is the telephone that is located in the room where you will be listening.
You must perform this procedure from that telephone. This procedure
toggles the operation on and off.
Special Conditions
If the monitored telephone is in use, the monitoring (listening) telephone cannot
monitor the room area.
If a user attempts to set a telephone as a monitored telephone (the telephone located
in the area to be monitored) and it is already set as a monitoring telephone (listening
telephone), "ERROR" is displayed in the telephone LCD.
If a user attempts to set a telephone as a monitoring telephone (listening telephone)
and it is already set as monitored telephone (the telephone located in the area to be
monitored) , "ERROR" is displayed in the telephone LCD.
When a telephone is enabled as a monitored telephone (the telephone located in the
area to be monitored), background music is no longer heard.
System Manual
3 - 131
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Only one monitored telephone (the telephone located in the area to be monitored)
can be designated at a time, however any number of multiline telephones can be set
as monitoring (listening) telephones.
While a telephone is being monitored (the telephone located in the area to be
monitored), the microphone LED flashes red.
When a telephone is enabled as the monitoring (listening) telephone, the speaker
LED flashes red.
3 - 132
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Seized Trunk Name/Number Display
The telephone number (assigned in system programming) for each trunk in the
system is displayed when this feature is enabled. The telephone number appears in
the telephone display when the trunk is seized.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones equipped
with a display.
Feature Operation
Automatically displaying the telephone number:
Press
(trunk line key) while the telephone is idle. The telephone line is seized
and the telephone number and associated name (assigned in system programming)
are displayed.
Manually displaying the telephone number with a call in progress:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
. The trunk line is seized and the telephone number and associated
name (assigned in system programming) are displayed.
Assigning a name to a trunk line:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Enter the name. (Refer to Character Registration on page 3-44.)
Note:
The name is a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters.
4.
Press
.
Deleting a name:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Press
.
System Manual
3 - 133
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
101~104
Telephone Number Display for Trunk Lines 1~4
Y
Special Conditions
Trunk information cannot be displayed during an add-on conference that includes an
external line.
The telephone number assigned to the external trunk line is displayed in the first line
of the telephone LCD. The name associated with the external trunk line is displayed
in the second line of the telephone LCD.
If a name has not been assigned for the seized trunk line, the telephone number of
external line number is displayed in the first line of the LCD.
A one-touch/feature access key that has been programmed to verify the external line
number and name can only be used while a call is in progress.
The seized trunk number displayed is shown during redialing. The number is
displayed for five seconds and then the elapsed call timer is restored to the LCD.
A name can be programmed for each trunk line. The name is a maximum of 16
alphanumeric characters.
3 - 134
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Single Line Telephone Access
Single line telephones can be connected to the system. These telephones can be
used to make external calls, internal calls and paging calls.
To provide this feature for InfoSet 408 systems, an SLI(2)-B10 ETU and PBR-B10
ETU must be installed in the KSU.
Feature Operation
Originating an internal call when the outgoing call priority mode is set to seize an
internal line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the desired extension number.
3.
Talk when the called party answers.
Originating an internal call when the outgoing call priority mode is set to seize an
external line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Press hookflash.
3.
Dial the desired extension number.
4.
Talk when the called party answers.
Originating an external call when the outgoing call priority mode is set to seize
an external line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the desired telephone number.
3.
Talk when the called party answers.
System Manual
3 - 135
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Originating an external call when the outgoing call priority mode is set to seize
an internal line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the access code to access a trunk (default: 9) or feature access code
X (X = Trunk Number 1~4).
3.
Dial the desired telephone number.
4.
Talk when the called party answers.
Answering calls:
Lift the handset and talk with the calling party.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
001-9
Single Line Telephone Hookflash Assignment
N
206
Extension Number Assignment
N
207
Single Line Port Type
N
208
Single Line Dialing Type
N
209
Outgoing Call Priority Mode
N
502
Single Line Telephone Bounce Time
N
503
Single Line Telephone Hookflash Start Time
N
504
Single Line Telephone Hookflash End Time
N
3 - 136
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Special Conditions
At default, all stations are programmed to access an available external line when the
handset is lifted. If all external lines are busy, the user receives a busy tone.
Hookflash can be assigned as hold or as hookflash by assigning Function "001-9
Single Line Telephone Hookflash Assignment".
Speed dialing, last number redial, call pickup, internal paging, trunk queuing, etc., are
available when feature access codes are dialed. Feature access codes must be
dialed from internal dialtone.
Multiline telephone users can receive voice announced calls from single line
telephone users.
An SLI(2)-B10 ETU can support two extensions.
If a PBR-B10 ETU is not installed in the system and a single line telephone goes
off-hook, an error tone is generated.
After the single line telephone user goes off-hook, the user has 30 seconds to begin
dialing before the DTMF release timer expires. After the DTMF timer expires, a busy
tone is generated.
The DTMF release timer restarts each time the single line telephone is taken
off-hook.
System Manual
3 - 137
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Single Line Telephone Adapter
The Single Line Telephone Adapter allows electronic telephone ports to support single
line telephones. A single line telephone can be connected to the telephone port by
using a single line adapter and single pair cabling.
To provide this feature, a spare ESI port, an SLT-F(1)-U10 ADP, and PBR-B10 ETU
are required.
Feature Operation
Originating an internal call:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the desired extension number.
3.
Talk when the called party answers.
Originating an external call:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the access code to access a trunk (default: 9).
3.
Dial the desired telephone number.
4.
Talk when the called party answers.
Answering calls:
Lift the handset and talk with the calling party.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
001-9
Single Line Telephone Hookflash Assignment
N
207
Single Line Port Type
N
3 - 138
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
208
Single Line Dialing Type
N
209
Outgoing Call Priority Mode
N
503
Single Line Telephone Hookflash Start Timer
N
504
Single Line Telephone Hookflash End Timer
N
Special Conditions
A maximum of two single line telephone adapters can be installed in a system.
The system automatically detects the connection of single line telephone adapters.
The dialing type (DP or DTMF) can be individually assigned using Function "208
Single Line Dialing Type" for each adapter. DTMF is the default.
A dial pulse telephone can be connected to a single line telephone adapter, however
a PBR-B10 ETU is still required.
Message waiting and voice mail are available for single line telephones.
System Manual
3 - 139
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Softkeys
The Electra Elite multiline telephones provide softkeys speed dial operation. The
speed dial directory can be searched using the softkeys. By simply entering either a
number or a letter, a list of matching speed dial numbers is displayed. The system
allows users to scroll the list and then dial the number.
This feature is available for Electra Elite multiline telephones equipped with softkeys.
Feature Operation
Searching the speed dial directory using a softkey:
User can search the speed dial memory locations by manually scrolling through the
Speed Dial Directory.
1.
Press(SYS or STA).
2.
Press(UP or DOWN) to view the list.
3.
Press
(external line key) or lift the handset.
Searching the speed dial directory alphabetically or numerically:
The search can be narrowed by entering the first letter of the name or first digit of the
phone number. To search using a name, the user dials the first letter(s) of the name
using the dialpad keys on the Electra Elite telephone. For example to search for
NEC, the user dials(i.e., there are three letters associated with dialpad
key 6 M, N and O). Dialing displays names starting with the letter the N.
Thekey is used as an Enter key. Name(s) starting with N are displayed in the
telephone LCD. Using(UP and DOWN softkeys), the user can scroll to the
appropriate name and make a selection.
1.
While the telephone is idle, press(SYS or STA) to access system or station
speed dial numbers.
2.
If searching by name, press the dialpad key with the first letter of the name
followed by an.
If searching by telephone number, press the first digit of the number.
Once the list is displayed, press(UP or DOWN).
The following example shows how to search the directory for a name or
number starting with A, B, C or 2:
3 - 140
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Dial pad key 2 has the letters ABC. To search the name or number starting
with:
A =
B =
C =
2 =
Note:
If the user dials five 2's (22222) the system scrolls back to A.
Table 3-4 Speed Dial Search Keys provides a list of dialpad keys used to
search speed dial directories, the number of times the dialpad key must be
pressed and the result.
Table 3-4 Speed Dial Search Keys
Dialpad
Press
Press
Press Three
Press Four
Press Five
Key
Once
Twice
Times
Times
Times
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
A
B
C
2
Returns to A
D
E
F
3
Returns to D
G
H
I
4
Returns to G
J
K
L
5
Returns to J
M
N
O
6
Returns to M
P
Q
R
S
7
T
U
V
8
Returns to T
W
X
Y
Z
9
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Dialing the selected number once is has been located:
Lift the handset (if the system has been assigned for external line priority mode using
Function "209 Outgoing Call Priority Mode".)
- OR -
Press an idle(if the system has been assigned for internal line priority mode
using Function "209 Outgoing Call Priority Mode".)
System Manual
3 - 141
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
001-2
Speed Dial Assignment
N
209
Outgoing Call Priority Mode
N
Special Conditions
If two different keys are pressed while performing a search, the system only
recognizes the last key that was pressed beforewas pressed. For example, if
and are pressed, the system only recognizesand displays A.
Scrolling speed dialing is only available on the Electra Elite telephones that are
equipped with softkeys and an LCD. The third line of the telephone LCD displays the
following softkeys, which are used to access scrolling and navigate through the speed
dial entries.
·
SYS
Accesses system speed dialing numbers.
·
STA
Accesses station speed dialing numbers.
·
UP
Moves "up" to display the previous speed dial number for system or
station speed dialing.
·
DOWN
Moves "down" to display the next speed dial number for system or
station speed dialing.
When scrolling, the system uses the following criteria to display the information in the
order listed below:
·
Spaces
Spaces entered at the beginning of a name are ignored during scrolling (e.g.,
^^^Jean is sorted as Jean, the spaces are ignored during sorting).
·
Alphabetical Characters
Uppercase and lowercase letters are disregarded for sorting purposes.
·
Digits
·
Special Characters
Alphabetic or numeric searches are not allowed using special characters,
however they can be searched using the softkeys to scroll sequentially through
the speed dial memory locations.
3 - 142
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Pressing(SYS or STA) has no affect if speed dial numbers have not been stored
in the system.
If duplicate names are stored for different speed dial memory locations, the speed dial
memory location with the lowest numbered location number is displayed.
The system uses the following criteria when displaying both telephone numbers and
the associated names.
·
When both the telephone number and associated name are stored, the name is
displayed.
·
When only the telephone number is stored, only the telephone number is
displayed.
·
When only the name is stored, the system ignores the entry and nothing is
displayed.
The length of the telephone numbers and associated names depends on how many
system and personal (station) speed dial memory locations are assigned in system
programming using Function "001-2 Speed Dial Assignment".
·
If the system is programmed for 80 system/20 personal (station) speed dial
memory locations, the maximum alphanumeric characters is 13.
·
If the system is programmed for 200 system/0 personal (station) speed dial
memory locations, the maximum alphanumeric characters is 12.
Scrolling mode is canceled when one of the following keys is pressed: , ,
, , , , or (DSS key).
The following keys are ignored if pressed during scrolling mode: , (STA or
STA), , or .
If no action is performed for more than 10 seconds while scrolling, scrolling mode is
canceled.
During scrolling mode, calls can only be answered by pressingor.
System Manual
3 - 143
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
SPD (InfoSet) or Redial (Electra Elite) Key
This feature allows users to press the
(on InfoSet telephones) or the(on
Electra Elite telephones), to access speed dial memory locations.
This feature is available for the InfoSet or Electra Elite telephones.
Feature Operation
Accessing speed dial memory locations:
1.
Press
(on InfoSet telephones) or(on Electra Elite telephones).
2.
Enter the speed dial memory location number.
The number that has been programmed for the speed dial memory location
number is displayed in the telephone LCD and is dialed.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
009
Outgoing Call Line Selection
N
109
Trunk Line Dialing Type
N
331~334
Automatic Answering using Trunk Lines 1~4
N
Special Conditions
When dialing using
or, the system accesses the idle external lines by
selecting the highest numbered external lines first (e.g., 4, 3, 2, 1). The line must be
enabled in system programming using Function "109 Trunk Line Dialing Type".
If an external line is not available "ERROR" is displayed in the telephone LCD and an
error tone is heard.
When placing a call using manual dialing, speed dialing or a combination of manual/
speed dialing, the first 24 digits that are dialed are stored in last number redial
memory.
3 - 144
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
The
(for InfoSet telephones) or(for Electra Elite telephones) keys can
also be used for the following features/operations:
·
Placing pauses between numbers that are stored in speed dial memory
locations.
·
Assigning operations to one-touch/feature access keys.
·
Setting the automatic redial feature.
System Manual
3 - 145
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Specified CO/PBX Line Seizure
This feature allows users to seize a specific trunk line by either dialing an access code
and the trunk line number.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Seizing a specific trunk line:
1.
Lift the handset or press .
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the trunk line number.
The trunk line is seized and the user hears dialtone.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
009
Outgoing Call Line Selection
N
Special Conditions
External lines that are assigned to a different tenant cannot be seized.
This feature can be used to access an external line that is on hold. This can be done
from any telephone including a single line telephone.
3 - 146
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Speed Dial Extension
Each extension in the system can be allowed up to 20 personal speed dial numbers.
For personal speed dial numbers to be available, the system must be set to 80 mode
in system programming. Selecting 80 mode reserves 20 personal speed dial
numbers for each telephone user.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and single
line telephones. Single line telephones can be used to set up and originate speed
dialing but it cannot be used to confirm speed dial numbers.
Feature Operation
Programming a speed dial number using a multiline telephone:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(InfoSet multiline telephones) or (Electra Elite multiline
telephones).
3.
Dial the speed dial memory location number (
~
).
4.
Enter the desired telephone number (maximum of 24 digits).
If a pause is needed, press either
or. If a hookflash is needed,
press either
or. If nesting numbers, press or to enter
the brackets.
If entering an associated "name" (alphabetic characters), press
. (Refer
to Character Registration on page 3-44 for instructions about entering
alphanumeric characters.)
5.
Press
.
Programming a speed dial number using a single line telephone:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the speed dial memory location number (
~
) where the
telephone number is stored.
4.
Enter the desired telephone number to be stored in the speed dial memory
location.
5.
Place the handset in the cradle.
System Manual
3 - 147
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Speed dialing using a multiline telephone:
1.
Press
(external line key).
2.
Press
(InfoSet multiline telephones) or (Electra Elite multiline
telephones).
3.
Dial the speed dial memory location number (
~
) where the
telephone number is stored.
4.
The number is automatically dialed.
Speed dialing using a single line telephone:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the speed dial memory location number (
~
) where the
telephone number is stored.
4.
The number is automatically dialed.
Deleting a speed dial number using a multiline telephone:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(InfoSet multiline telephones) or (Electra Elite multiline
telephones).
3.
Dial the speed dial memory location number (
~
) where the
telephone number is stored.
If deleting the associated "name" (alphabetic characters), press
. If only
deleting the speed dial number, proceed to the next step.
4.
Press
.
3 - 148
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Deleting a speed dial number using a single line telephone:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial the speed dial memory location number (
~
) where the
telephone number is stored.
4.
Place the handset in the cradle.
Confirming a speed dial number using a multiline telephone:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(InfoSet multiline telephones) or (Electra Elite multiline
telephones).
3.
Dial the speed dial memory location number (
~
) where the
telephone number is stored.
4.
The number is displayed in the telephone LCD.
Special Conditions
Speed dial numbers are stored in redial memory. Speed dialing memory is stored in
the system's backup battery.
The maximum number of digits that can be stored in a speed dial memory location is
24. If the user attempts to dial more than 24 digits, "ERROR" is displayed in the
telephone LCD for five seconds.
When a pause (
) or hookflash ( ) is programmed as part of the speed dial
number, it is counted as a digit.
If a user attempts to initiate speed dialing from a speed dial memory location that has
not been programmed, "XX:EMPTY or XXX:EMPTY is displayed in the telephone
LCD. (XX or XXX = Speed Dial Memory Location Number).
If a call is originated for a speed dial memory location that has both the telephone
number and associated "name" programmed, the number and name are displayed in
the telephone LCD. Once the called party answers, the telephone LCD displays the
clock.
If a call is originated on a CO line using a stored speed dial number for which no PBX
access code is defined and the system supports both CO and PBX lines, the CO line
is released and an error tone is generated.
System Manual
3 - 149
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Entering a pause, hookflash or nesting numbers is only available if programming
speed dial numbers on multiline telephones (i.e., these are not available when
programming speed dial numbers on single line telephones).
A maximum of five system and extension (personal) speed dial memory location
numbers can be programmed into one speed dial memory location.
An external speed dial memory location number can be assigned to a one-touch/
feature access key.
System speed dial numbers can be nested under extension (personal) speed dial
memory locations however, extension speed dial numbers cannot be nested under
system speed dial memory locations.
Contents of the speed dial memory location can be verified and cleared.
3 - 150
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Speed Dial System
Speed dialing can be assigned on a system-wide basis. System speed dialing can be
set to 200 numbers or 80 numbers. If 200 is selected, individual users are not allowed
to assign personal speed dialing numbers on their telephones. If 80 is selected, then
each telephone user can set up to 20 personal speed dial numbers and 80 speed dial
numbers are reserved for system speed dialing.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and single
line telephones. Single line telephones can be used to set up and originate speed
dialing but cannot be used to confirm speed dial numbers. Programming, deleting
and verifying speed dial numbers can only be performed using an attendant
telephone (ports 1 and 2).
Feature Operation
Programming a speed dial number from an attendant telephone:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(InfoSet multiline telephones) or(Electra Elite multiline
telephones).
3.
Dial the speed dial buffer number where the number will be stored
(
~
or
~
).
4.
Dial the telephone number (maximum 24 digits).
If a pause is needed, press either
or. If a hookflash is needed,
press either
or. If nesting numbers, press orto enter
the brackets.
If entering an associated "name" (alphabetic characters), press
. (Refer
to Character Registration on page 3-44 for instructions about entering
alphanumeric characters.)
5.
Press
.
Placing a speed dial call in from a telephone in a key function (squared) system:
1.
Press
(outside line key).
2.
Lift the handset.
3.
When dialtone is heard, press
(InfoSet multiline telephones) or
(Electra Elite multiline telephones).
4.
Dial the appropriate speed dial buffer number (
~
or
~
).
System Manual
3 - 151
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Placing a speed dial call from a telephone in a multifunction (non-squared or
hybrid) system:
1.
Press
(InfoSet multiline telephones) or (Electra Elite multiline
telephones).
2.
When dialtone is heard, dial the appropriate speed dial buffer number
(
~
or
~
).
Placing a speed dial call using a single line telephone:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
When internal dialtone is heard, dial
.
3.
Dial the speed dial buffer number (
~
or
~
).
Deleting a speed dial number using an attendant telephone:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(InfoSet multiline telephones) or (Electra Elite multiline
telephones).
3.
Dial the speed dial memory location number where the telephone number is
stored (
~
or
~
).
If deleting the associated "name" (alphabetic characters), press
. If only
deleting the speed dial number, proceed to the next step.
4.
Press
.
Confirming a speed dial number using a multiline telephone:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(InfoSet multiline telephones) or (Electra Elite multiline
telephones).
3.
Dial the speed dial memory location number where the telephone number is
stored (
~
or
~
).
4.
The number is displayed in the telephone LCD.
3 - 152
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Special Conditions
Speed dial numbers are stored in redial memory. Speed dialing memory is stored in
the system's backup battery.
The maximum number of digits that can be stored in a speed dial memory location is
24. If the user attempts to dial more than 24 digits, "ERROR" is displayed in the
telephone LCD for five seconds.
When a pause (
) or hookflash ( ) is programmed as part of the speed dial
number, it is counted as a digit.
If a user attempts to initiate speed dialing from a speed dial memory location that has
not been programmed, "XX:EMPTY or XXX:EMPTY is displayed in the telephone
LCD. (XX or XXX = Speed Dial Memory Location Number).
If a call is originated for a speed dial memory location that has both the telephone
number and associated "name" programmed, the number and name are displayed in
the telephone LCD. Once the called party answers, the telephone LCD displays the
clock.
If a call is originated on a CO line using a stored speed dial number for which no PBX
access code is defined and the system supports both CO and PBX lines, the CO line
is released and an error tone is generated.
Entering a pause, hookflash or nesting numbers is only available if programming
speed dial numbers on multiline telephones (i.e., these are not available when
programming speed dial numbers on single line telephones).
A maximum of five system and extension (personal) speed dial memory location
numbers can be programmed into one speed dial memory location.
An external speed dial memory location number can be assigned to a one-touch/
feature access key.
System speed dial numbers can be nested under extension (personal) speed dial
memory locations however, extension speed dial numbers cannot be nested under
system speed dial memory locations.
Contents of the speed dial memory location can be verified and cleared.
System Manual
3 - 153
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Station Message Detail Recording provides detailed calls records of system
telephone usage. This feature is useful for controlling costs by identifying telephone
users, trunk usages, and numbers dialed. SMDR supports the connection of call
accounting equipment that audits local and long distance telephone bills.
An MIF-B10 ETU is required to support this feature.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
002-9
Station Message Detail Recording
Y
024
Print Format
N
025
Baud Rate to Printer
Y
026
Stop Bit for Printer
N
Special Conditions
If a power failure occurs during a call, the call is terminated and the call record
information is lost.
If the SMDR feature is disabled in system programming (Function "002-9 Station
Message Detail Recording"), printout or data storage is not performed.
SMDR only generates information for outgoing and transferred outgoing calls.
If a printer is not connected to the system or if the printer is not operating, the MIF-B10
ETU can store information for 200 calls. Once the memory is full, the oldest call
record is erased and the new record is stored.
3 - 154
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
When the memory on the MIF-B10 ETU becomes 80% full, the system generates an
alert that is displayed on an attendant position telephone LCD. When the memory
falls below 80% the alert clears from the telephone LCD.
Using
, the user manually switches between PC programming mode
and SMDR mode. If PC programming mode is selected, SMDR data is stored in
memory on the MIF-B10 ETU. IF SMDR mode is selected, SMDR data is sent to the
printer connected to the MIF-B10 ETU.
If a PC is connected to the system instead of a printer and SMDR mode has been
selected, SMDR data is output to the PC (i.e., no data is stored in memory on the
MIF-B10 ETU).
When the printer is connected, data stored in memory on the MIF-B10 ETU is printed
out. New call records are printed as they are received.
No record is generated if the caller hangs up before the elapsed call timer starts.
The print format is:
Extension
External Line
Type of
Call Start
Call Stop
Dialed Telephone
Number
Number
Call
Time
Time
Number
10 1 OUT 01-25
09:15:25 09:17:30
9727517626
Month Day
OUT = Outgoing Call
TRF = Transferred Call
The EIA RS-232C port, used to interface with the external device, must conform to
the following specifications:
Synchronization:
Start/Stop
Data Length:
8 bits
Parity Bits:
None
Stop Bits:
1
Start Bits:
1
Baud Rate:
Up to 38,400 bps
Cable:
RS-232C (D-sub, 9-pin) straight
System Manual
3 - 155
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Step Call
This feature allows a user, who calls a busy extension, to call the next extension
number in the system by simply dialing a preassigned digit. This can be done without
having to hang up between call attempts.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Using the Step Call feature when calling a busy extension:
1.
Dial another extension number.
2.
If that extension is also busy, continue this process until you reach an idle
extension number.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
206
Extension Number Assignment
N
3 - 156
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Stored Hookflash
This feature allows a hookflash to be stored in a speed dial memory location. This
allows multiline telephone users to store the hookflash which is used to allow access
to features such as transferring calls, conferencing, in a speed dial buffer, etc.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Programming a hookflash on a one-touch/feature access key for speed dialing:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(for InfoSet telephones) or(for Elite telephones).
3.
Enter the speed dial memory location number.
4.
Press
(for InfoSet telephones) or(for Elite telephones). This enters a
hookflash.
5.
Enter the telephone number to be stored in the speed dial memory location.
6.
Press
.
Programming a hookflash on a one-touch/feature access key for speed dialing
when the external line is a PBX line:
1.
Press
.
2.
Press
(for InfoSet telephones) or(for Electra Elite telephones).
3.
Press the one-touch/feature access key where the number will be stored.
4.
Press
.
5.
Press
(for InfoSet telephones) or(for Electra Elite telephones).
6.
Enter the telephone number to be stored in the speed dial memory location.
7.
Press
.
Note:
The external line must be assigned as a PBX line using Function "107
Trunk Line Type".
System Manual
3 - 157
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
107
Trunk Line Type
N
Special Conditions
This feature is only available for multiline telephones.
A hookflash can be entered for system and station speed dial numbers.
3 - 158
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
System Set Button
This feature allows the user to enter system programming mode without using the
step-by-step method for entering programming.
This feature is only available for the InfoSet telephones.
Feature Operation
Activating the system set button:
1.
Remove the protective plastic panel that covers the line keys.
2.
Press the Set button (this can be done while engaged on an external call or
while the telephone is in the idle condition).
Set Button
3.
Make the system programming changes. (Data is not written to system memory
until the telephone is in the idle condition.)
Special Conditions
System programming can also be accessed by pressing:
and .
System Manual
3 - 159
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Telephone Volume Control
This feature allows Multiline Telephone users to control the handset and the speaker/
ringing volume by pressing the up and down volume buttons on the telephone. It also
allows the user to change the contrast on the LCD of the Electra Elite telephones.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite telephones.
Feature Operation
Changing the on-hook ringing volume on InfoSet or Elite telephones:
1.
Press or lift the handset.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial
.
4.
Press
(= louder or = softer) to increase or decrease the volume
(for Elite telephones = louder or = softer).
Changing the LCD contrast (Electra Elite telephones only):
1.
Press .
2.
Dial.
3.
Dial.
4.
Press( = darker = lighter) to increase or decrease the LCD contrast.
5.
Go on-hook.
- OR -
While the telephone is idle, press( = darker = lighter) to increase or
decrease the LCD contrast.
3 - 160
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Changing the off-hook ringing volume on InfoSet or Elite telephones:
1.
Press .
2.
Dial
.
3.
Dial
.
4.
Lift the handset.
5.
Press
(= louder or = softer) to increase or decrease the volume
(for Elite telephones = louder or = softer).
Changing the handset receiver volume on InfoSet or Elite telephones:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Press
(= louder or = softer) to increase or decrease the volume
(for Elite telephones = louder or = softer).
Setting speaker volume:
1.
Press .
2.
Press
(= louder or = softer) to increase or decrease the volume
(for Elite telephones = louder or = softer).
3.
Go on-hook.
- OR -
While using the speakerphone, press
(= louder or = softer) to
increase or decrease the volume (for Elite telephones = louder or
= softer).
Special Conditions
LCD contrast can be adjusted using(Electra Elite telephones only).
The manual volume and contrast settings are preserved regardless of the original
setting in system programming.
When the user presses the InfoSet volume key
(= louder or = softer)
while the telephone is in the idle condition, the volume of incoming calls is
adjusted. When the user press the Electra Elite volume key( = darker or
= lighter) while the telephone is in the idle condition, the LCD contrast is
adjusted.
System Manual
3 - 161
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Tenant Service
This feature allows the outside lines to be subdivided in into two tenant groups or call
pickup groups. This allows each tenant to have access to their own assigned outside
line. Users cannot pick up calls coming into another tenant group.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
401
Trunk Line Assignment for Tenant 1
Y
402
Trunk Line Assignment for Tenant 2
Y
403
Tenant-to-Telephone Assignment
Y
Special Conditions
Each external line and telephone is assigned to tenants 1 or 2 using system
programming. At default, all external lines and telephones are assigned to tenant 1.
Each external line can be assigned to more than one tenant (i.e., duplicate tenant
allowed). However, telephones can only be a member of one tenant group (i.e.,
duplicate tenants are not allowed).
CO/PBX LEDs associated with other tenants will not light when in use.
The following features are available when users are members of different tenant
groups:
·
All Call Page
·
Automatic Callback
·
Call Pickup Group
·
Call Transfer
·
Conference Add-On
·
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling
·
Step Call
·
Tone Override
3 - 162
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
The following features are not available when users are members of different tenant
groups:
·
Barge-In (Interrupting an External Call)
·
Holdfree Transfer
·
Manual Line Seizure
·
Privacy on all Calls
·
Specified CO/PBX Line Seizure
·
Trunk Queuing
System Manual
3 - 163
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Timed Alarm
A timed alarm can be set to any multiline telephone as a reminder of a scheduled
time. The user can program the system to automatically send a reminder alarm to
their telephone. Two timed alarms are available system-wide.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Setting a timed alarm:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
(Alarm 1) or
(Alarm 2).
3.
Enter the time (hours and minutes) when you want the alarm to sound.
4.
Press
.
Canceling a timed alarm:
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
(Alarm 1) or
(Alarm 2).
3.
Press
.
Confirming a timed alarm :
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
(Alarm 1) or
(Alarm 2).
3.
Press
.
Canceling a timed alarm: (attendant position only):
1.
Press
.
2.
Dial
.
3.
Press
.
3 - 164
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Special Conditions
In the following cases, no alarm is sounded:
·
A handsfree call is in progress or room monitoring is in progress.
·
An internal voice announced call or tone signal call is being received.
·
An incoming doorphone ringing call.
Alarm 1 automatically resets (releases) when it sounds.
Alarm 2 does not reset, it sounds each day at an preassigned time.
If both alarms are set to the same time, only alarm 1 sounds. Alarm 2 will sound at
the next preassigned time.
A user can cancel an alarm that sounds at their telephone by pressing any of the keys
on the telephone (except the volume key).
Feature access codes and preset times can be assigned to a one-touch/feature
access key. When a timed alarm sounds, the LED on the one-touch/feature access
key (where the access code or time is assigned) lights red while the alarm sounds.
When an alarm sounds, "ALARM: X" is shown in the telephone display for 10
seconds. (X = 1 or 2)
An alarm can sound when the user has a call in progress.
Preset times must be specified in military time (24-hour clock = 00:00~23:59).
Only attendant positions can be used to reset alarms system-wide.
Both alarms can be reset system-wide.
When a timed alarm is set on an InfoSet telephone, a clock icon is also shown in the
telephone display. The icon disappears when Alarm 1 ends, however if Alarm 2 is
set, the clock is continually displayed.
System Manual
3 - 165
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Tone Override
Tone Override is used by one user to signal another user, who is engaged on a call,
that they have an incoming call. The called party can answer the incoming call by
putting the existing call on hold.
This feature also allows the user to switch between a tone override call and an
existing call. When the user answers the tone override call, the existing call is put on
hold. By pressing
, the user can switch between the two calls.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Originating a Tone Override:
1.
After hearing a tone, dial
(set as default) to send the override tone.
2.
After hearing a confirmation tone, wait for the called party to answer call.
Answering a Tone Override:
After hearing the override tone, press and talk with the calling party.
Answering the override call and switching between callers:
1.
After hearing the override tone, press to put the existing call on hold and to
answer override call.
2.
Talk with the override caller.
3.
To switch between the two callers, press
.
Special Conditions
This feature is not available if the telephone is in one of the following conditions:
·
The telephone is being used to assign one-touch/feature access keys, speed
dial numbers, scrolling, etc.
·
The telephone is being used to program the system.
·
A single line telephone is called.
·
The called telephone is set to do not disturb.
Tone override is only enabled when the called telephone is busy.
3 - 166
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
The user can answer the tone override by pressing (during an internal/external
call or while engaged in an add-on conference).
A single line telephone has 30 seconds to send a tone override before it is disabled.
If the user is speaking on the speakerphone and a tone override is received, the
speech path is temporarily disrupted and the party sending the tone override hears a
call waiting tone.
When tone override is released, the telephone display returns to the previous
condition.
A telephone cannot receive multiple tone overrides.
If a user is engaged on an external call and hangs up while a tone override is being
received, the call becomes an internal call.
A tone override call can be made to users who are members of another tenant group.
The tone override tone is generated each time the tone override operation is
performed.
System Manual
3 - 167
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Trunk Outgoing Restriction
When telephones are assigned this feature, users are restricted from making some
(or all) external calls (such as long distance calls). Users can continue to answer calls
however or may be able to make internal calls only. What is restricted is determined
by individual needs and is programmed in system programming.
This feature is available for the InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and
single line telephones.
Feature Operation
Depends on how this feature is programmed.
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
351~354
Restricting Outgoing Calls for Trunk Lines 1~4
Y
Special Conditions
A telephone that has outgoing restriction enabled cannot bypass the restriction by
pressing
(for InfoSet telephones) or(for Electra Elite telephones) when a
call is received. If the user attempts to make a call, the call is disconnected and
"ERROR" is displayed in the telephone LCD.
At system default, all external lines and all telephones are enabled for both incoming
and outgoing calls.
Outgoing restriction can be programmed for each external line and telephone using
system programming.
3 - 168
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Trunk Queuing
When all outside lines are busy, telephone users can queue onto the busy line. When
the line becomes available the system rings the telephone user to notify them that the
a line is available. The user can cancel the queue at any time.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones and single
line telephones.
Feature Operation
Setting trunk queuing when all external lines are busy:
1.
Press the appropriate external line key.
- OR -.
Lift the handset and dial .
- OR -
Press and dial .
2.
When you hear the busy tone, dial
. The telephone display indicates
the queue is set.
3.
When you hear the recall, lift the handset or press .
4.
Dial the desired telephone number.
Canceling trunk queuing:
1.
Lift the handset or press .
2.
Dial
. The telephone display indicates the queue is canceled.
System Manual
3 - 169
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Associated Programming
All programming functions associated with this feature are listed in the following table.
Some functions must be programmed before the feature is operational and other
functions are optional. The optional functions can affect how the feature operates.
Required
Function
Function Name
(Y)es or
Number
(N)o
001-6
Trunk Line Direct Access
N
002-8
Private Call
N
209
Outgoing Call Priority Mode
N
Special Conditions
Trunk queuing is not allowed if the telephone is a member of a different tenant group.
Trunk queuing is enabled for the following conditions:
·
When
and the trunk number are dialed to seize a specific external
line.
·
When dial access code
is dialed.
·
When the telephone is set for external line preference.
If the telephone is not set to seize an external line, trunk queuing is disabled for that
telephone and an error tone is heard when trunk queuing is attempted.
The following messages are displayed when trunk queuing is enabled/disabled:
·
Enabled = TRUNK QUE SET
·
Disabled = TRUNK QUE CNCL
If the telephone is equipped with an LCD, "LINE IDLE" is displayed to notify the user
the line is now available.
The system provides ring notification to the telephone that set trunk queuing for 10
seconds. After 10 seconds, ringing stops and trunk queuing is released.
If trunk queuing is set to an external line and an incoming call is received on that line,
trunk queuing notification is delayed until after that telephone is idle.
If there is more than one telephone queued to the same external line, the recall is
generated in the order in which the telephones set trunk queuing. If one of the
queued telephones is busy when recall is attempted, the recall is directed to the next
idle telephone. The busy telephone remains in the queue and will be recalled when
the telephone becomes idle.
3 - 170
Features
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Two-Color LEDs (Lamp)
The system provides two-color (red and green) LEDs to provide various status
indications of the telephone. Hold and call waiting are a couple of examples of status
indications.
This feature is available for InfoSet and Electra Elite multiline telephones.
Feature Operation
Not applicable.
Special Conditions
The line keys on all multiline telephones can light both red and green.
The LED lights green for the following feature and red for all other features:
·
Call Transfer
·
Hold with Recall (Exclusive and Non-Exclusive)
·
I-Hold Indication
·
I-Use Indication
System Manual
3 - 171
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
User Programming
Users are allowed to program the following features using their InfoSet and Electra
Elite multiline telephones and single line telephones.
Ancillary Device Connection
Attendant Positions
Call Forward - All Calls
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
Clock/Calendar Display
Character Registration
Distinctive Ringing
Extension Name Assignment
Incoming Call Identification
Nesting Dial
Off-Hook Ringing
One-Touch/Feature Access Keys User Programmable
Programmable Pause for Speed Dial
Speed Dial Extension
Speed Dial System
Stored Hookflash
Timed Alarm
Special Conditions
Feature programming must be done while the system is idle.
3 - 172
Features
Telephones
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
The InfoSet 408 system is capable of supporting two telephone types. This allows
flexibility for individual customers.
InfoSet 408 Telephones
Electra Elite Telephones
1.1
InfoSet 408 Telephones
The following InfoSet 408 telephones can be used with the InfoSet 408
system:
16-line telephone without display [DTB-16-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL]
16-line telephone with display [DTB-16D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL]
DTB-16-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTB-16D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
16-Line Non-Display
16-Line Display
Figure 4-1 InfoSet 408 Telephones
System Manual
4 - 1
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
1.2
Electra Elite Telephones
The following Electra Elite telephones can be used with the InfoSet 408
system:
2-line telephone without display [DTP-2DT-1 (WH) TEL
8-line telephone without display [DTU-8-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL]
8-line telephone with display [DTU-8D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL]
16-line telephone without display [DTU-16-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL]
16-line telephone with display [DTU-16D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL]
32-line telephone without display and 16 programmable One-Touch
keys [DTU-32-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL]
32-line telephone with display and 16 programmable One-Touch
keys [DTU-32D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL]
Single line telephone with flash key, redial key, 3-level receive
volume control, 2-level ring volume control, data jack and message
waiting lamp [DTP-1-1 (WH) TEL]
Single line telephone with flash key, redial key, 3-level receive
volume control, data jack, message waiting lamp and one-touch/
feature access keys for speed dialing [DTP-1HM-1 (WH) TEL]
4 - 2
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
DTP-2DT-1 (WH) TEL
DTU-8-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
2-Line Non-Display
8-Line Non-Display
DTU-8D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-16-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
8-Line Display
16-Line Non-Display
Figure 4-2 Electra Elite Telephones
System Manual
4 - 3
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
DTU-16D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-32-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL
16-Line Display
16-Line Non-Display with 16
Programmable One-Touch Keys
DTU-32D-2 (BK)/(WH) TEL
16-Line Display with 16 Programmable
One-Touch Keys
Figure 4-2 Electra Elite Telephones (Continued)
4 - 4
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
DTP-1-1 (WH) TEL
DTP-1HM-1 (WH) TEL
Figure 4-3 Single Line Telephones
System Manual
4 - 5
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
S
ECTION 2
WALL MOUNTING TELEPHONES
Two types of telephones are available with the InfoSet system; the InfoSet
telephones and the Electra Elite telephones. This section provides instructions for
installing both types of telephones.
2.1
Wall Mounting the InfoSet Telephones
The DTB-16-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL and DTB-16-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL can be
mounted to a wall.
1.
Locate the stoppers under the height adjustment stand on the bottom
of the telephone. You will need to lift the adjustment stand to expose
the foot stand holding the stoppers. Remove the two plastic
stoppers from the foot stand by firmly pushing on them.
Foot
Stand
Push
Push
Plastic Stopper
Lift the telephone stand to
expose the foot stand
Figure 4-4 Removing the Stoppers from the Adjustment Stand
4 - 6
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
2.
Remove the hanger (located on the bottom of the telephone). Insert
the hanger into the holes as indicated in the diagram.
Remove hanger from
bottom of telephone
Hanger
Push
Insert hanger
into holes
Figure 4-5 Attaching the Hanger to the Cradle of the InfoSet Telephone
3.
Use the wall mounting template to mark the screw positions on the
wall. The template is provided in Section 5 Wall Mounting Template
for InfoSet Telephones on page 4-33.
4.
Insert one end of the telephone line cord into the RJ-11 jack. Route
the cord inside the height adjustment stand as indicated in the
diagram. The cord can be wrapped more than once inside the height
adjustment stand to shorten the length of cord. The cord can exit
either the top of the telephone or the side, depending on the most
convenient location of the RJ-11 wall jack.
System Manual
4 - 7
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Figure 4-6 Routing the Telephone Cord Inside the Adjustment Stand
5.
Using a Phillips head screwdriver, insert the flat head wood screw
(provided) into the stopper and fasten to the wall.
Plastic
Wood Screw
3.29"
Stopper
(83.5 mm)
Wall
Figure 4-7 Fastening the Stoppers to the Wall
4 - 8
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
6.
To hang the telephone on the wall, place the grooves (located on the
bottom of the telephone) over the plastic stopper which has been
fastened to the wall. If the telephone is difficult to mount you may
want to loosen the screws holding the stopper.
Figure 4-8 Hanging the InfoSet Telephone on the Wall
7.
Insert the other end of the telephone line cord into an RJ-11 jack.
System Manual
4 - 9
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
2.2
Wall Mounting the Electra Elite Telephones
Electra Elite telephones can be mounted on a wall using the base unit that
comes with the telephone or by using the WMU-U Unit to accommodate
adapters that are installed on the telephone.
2.2.1
Wall Mounting using the Base Unit
1.
Remove the hanger by sliding it out of the slot.
2.
Install it back in its original position so that the hanger
protrudes providing a rest for the handset. (This procedure
applies when using either the base unit or the WMU-U Unit.)
Figure 4-9
Positioning the Handset Hanger on Electra
Elite Telephones
3.
Unplug the telephone cord from the telephone.
If installing adapters, do so now before proceeding to the
next step. (Refer to Chapter 5 Optional Equipment for
detailed instructions for installing adapters.)
4.
Turn the telephone upside down. Push the tabs indicated in
and raise the inner area of the base plate.
Push Tabs
Push Tabs
Figure 4-10
Raising the Base Plate on an Electra Elite
Telephone
4 - 10
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
5.
Insert the flat head screwdriver into A and press straight
down until the tab unlocks.
Flat Head
Flat Head
A
A
Tab
Tab
Figure 4-11 Unlocking the Tab on an Electra Elite Telephone
6.
Lightly press the right side of leg shown as B and insert the
flat head screwdriver at C. Press straight down until other
the tab unlocks.
Flat Head
Screwdriver
C
B
Figure 4-12
Releasing the Right Tab on an Electra Elite
Telephone
System Manual
4 - 11
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
7.
Open and remove the bottom cover by rotating it
counterclockwise.
Figure 4-13
Removing Bottom Cover on an Electra Elite
Telephone
8.
Press both sides of the base cover and turn it left to remove
it.
9.
Rotate the base cover 180°, and install it again on the
telephone.
10.
Remove the shaded base plate knockout with nippers.
Knockout
Figure 4-14
Removing the Knockout from an Electra Elite
Telephone
11.
Assemble the base plate and base cover.
4 - 12
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
12.
Attach the base plate and base cover assembly (wide end
down) to the posts on the wall plate (user-provided). Place
the screws (user-provided) in the nodes on the base plate
and secure the assembly to the wall.
Nodes
Nodes
Posts
Figure 4-15 Attaching the Base Plate to the Wall
If using a modular jack instead of a wall plate, put the
modular jack inside the base unit. Use the user-provided
screws to attach the base unit directly to the wall.
Modular Jack
Figure 4-16 Attaching the Base Plate using a Modular Jack
System Manual
4 - 13
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
13.
Plug the line cord into the jack on the wall plate, wrap the
extra cord and secure it with a tie wrap, and lead the line
cord out through the groove in the side of the base unit.
Figure 4-17 Plugging in the Line Cord using a Wall Jack
If using a modular jack instead of a wall plate, plug the line
cord into the modular jack, wrap the extra cord and secure it
with a tie wrap, and lead the line cord out through the
groove in the side of the base unit.
Figure 4-18 Plugging in the Line Cord Using a Modular Jack
4 - 14
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
14.
With the base plate and base cover assembly attached to
the wall, hook the two bottom tabs on the base cover into
the tab slots on the base of the telephone.
Base Unit
Telephone
Line Cord
Wall
Tab
Tab Slots
Figure 4-19
Attaching the Bottom Tabs of the Electra Elite
Telephone to the Base Cover
15.
Push up on the telephone and lock the top tabs on the base
cover into the tab slots on the base of the telephone. Turn
the telephone slightly clockwise to interface with the base
cover.
Tab Slots
Telephone
Tabs
Line Cord
Wall
Wall Mount
Unit
Figure 4-20
Attaching the Top Tabs of the Electra Elite
Telephone to the Base Plate
System Manual
4 - 15
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
16.
When properly installed, the wall mounted telephone looks
similar to the one shown in the diagram.
Do not adjust the tilt panel after the telephone is mounted
on the wall.
Figure 4-21
Installed Wall Mount Unit on an Electra
Elite Telephone
2.2.2
Installing the Wall Mount Unit and Mounting the Telephone using
the WMU-U Unit
The WMU-U Unit is used for wall mounting when adapters are
installed on the Electra Elite telephones.
1.
Remove the hanger by sliding it out of the slot.
2.
Install it back in its original position so that the hanger
protrudes providing a rest for the handset. (Refer to Figure
4-9 Positioning the Handset Hanger on Electra Elite
Telephones on page 4-10.)
3.
Unplug the telephone cord from the telephone.
If installing adapters, do so now before proceeding to the
next step. (Refer to Chapter 5 Optional Equipment for
detailed instructions for installing adapters.)
4.
Turn the telephone upside down. Push the tabs indicated in
and raise the inner area of the base plate. (Refer to Figure
4-10 Raising the Base Plate on an Electra Elite Telephone
on page 4-10.)
4 - 16
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
5.
Insert the flat head screwdriver into A and press straight
down until the tab unlocks. (Refer to Figure 4-11 Unlocking
the Tab on an Electra Elite Telephone on page 4-11.0
6.
Lightly press the right side of leg shown as B and insert the
flat head screwdriver at C. Press straight down until other
the tab unlocks. (Refer to Figure 4-12 Releasing the Right
Tab on an Electra Elite Telephone on page 4-11.)
7.
Open and remove the bottom cover by rotating it
counterclockwise. (Refer to Figure 4-13 Removing Bottom
Cover on an Electra Elite Telephone on page 4-12.)
8.
Remove the line cord, base plate and base cover from the
telephone.
9.
Cut off the tabs on the adapter.
Figure 4-22 Removing the Tabs from the Adapter
10.
Remove the tabs from the WMU-U Unit. (The tabs that are
removed depend on the telephone type.)
System Manual
4 - 17
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
DTU-8-1(BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-32-1(BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-8D-2(BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-32D-2(BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-16-1(BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-16D-2(BK)/(WH) TEL
DCU-60-1(BK)/(WH) CONSOLE
Figure 4-23 Removing the Tabs from the WMU-U Unit
11.
Bundle the cord from the modular jack leaving about eight
inches. Use a tie wrap to secure the bundled cord.
12.
Place the bundled line cord in the space between the
WMU-U Unit and the wall. Lead the line cord out through
the slits.
Figure 4-24 Leading the Line Cord out of the WMU-U Unit
4 - 18
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
13.
Attach the WMU-U Unit to the posts on the wall plate
(user-provided). Place the user-provided screws in the
nodes on the WMU-U Unit and secure the WMU-U Unit to
the wall.
Nodes
Posts
Nodes
Figure 4-25 Attaching the WMU-U Unit to the Wall
14.
Connect the line cord to the telephone.
15.
With the WMU-U Unit attached to the wall, hook the two
bottom tabs on the WMU-U Mount Unit into the tab slots on
the telephone. Then push the two top tabs on the WMU-U
Unit into the tab slots on the telephone. If the adapter has a
power supply, lead the AC adapter cord out through the
opening at the bottom of the telephone.
WMU-U Unit
Telephone
Adapter
Tab Slots
Wall
Figure 4-26 Attaching the Telephone to the WMU-U Unit
System Manual
4 - 19
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
2.3
Wall Mounting Single Line Telephones
The DTP-1-1 TEL and DTP-1HM-1 TEL can be wall mounted.
1.
Remove the hook from the unit.
Figure 4-27 Removing the Hook from a Single Line Telephone
2.
Turn the hook over (back to the front) with the tab toward the top.
Figure 4-28 Turning the Hook Over
3.
Slide the hook on its glides back down into position forming the
hanger hook for the handset.
Figure 4-29 Sliding the Hook into Position on a Single Line Telephone
4 - 20
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
4.
Unscrew the three screws on the unit to remove the plate.
Figure 4-30
Removing the Screws from the Base of a Single Line
Telephone
5.
Replace the plate and place the screws in the two positions indicated
in the diagram. (The one remaining screw can be placed at the
original third position.)
Figure 4-31
Replacing the Plate and Screws in the Base of the
Single Line Telephone
System Manual
4 - 21
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
6.
Loosen the screws on the wall telephone plate. Leave the screws
protruding enough to slip the telephone over the screws.
Figure 4-32 Protruding Screws
7.
Mount the telephone onto the protruding screws by slipping the
telephone over the screws as indicated in the diagram.
Figure 4-33 Mounting the Telephone
4 - 22
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
SECTION 3
ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT OF TELEPHONES
3.1
Adjusting the Height of InfoSet Telephones
The telephone stand can be used to prop the telephone at an angle.
1.
Locate the telephone stand on the bottom of the telephone.
Telephone Stand
Figure 4-34 Infoset Telephone Stand
2.
Pull the stand away from the telephone and pull up on the foot stand.
Select the desired height level and snap the tabs on the foot stand
into one of the two sets of grooves on the telephone stand.
Lift foot stand and
place into grooves
Figure 4-35 Adjusting the Height of the InfoSet Telephone
3.
If you want to return the telephone to the lowest position, pull the
telephone stand away from the foot stand. Fold the foot stand down
toward to base of the telephone and fold the telephone stand over
the foot stand and snap it into place.
System Manual
4 - 23
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
3.2
Adjusting the Height of the Electra Elite Telephones
The base plate on Electra Elite telephones are hinged. The bottom portion
can be adjusted up or down to raise or lower the height of the terminal.
1.
Turn the telephone upside down and locate the tabs as shown in
Figure 4-36 Locating the Adjustment Tabs on the Electra Elite
Telephone.
Figure 4-36 Locating the Adjustment Tabs on the Electra Elite Telephone
2.
Push the adjustment tabs and raise the base plate until it locks.
Figure 4-37 Raising the Base Plate on the Electra Elite Telephone
4 - 24
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
3.
The length of the cord can be adjusted by pulling the line cord though
the groove in the bottom of the telephone.
Figure 4-38 Adjusting the Line Cord Length on the Electra Elite Telephone
4.
To lower the base plate on the telephone, push on the adjustment
tabs and push the base plate downward.
Tab
Figure 4-39 Lowering the Base Plate on the Electra Elite Telephone
System Manual
4 - 25
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
3.3
Adjusting the LCD on the Electra Elite Display Telephones
The adjustable Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) comes equipped on the
display Electra Elite telephones. The LCD can be adjusted by pushing
downward and upward as desired.
Figure 4-40 Adjusting the LCD on the Electra Elite Telephone
4 - 26
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
SECTION 4
INSTALLING LINE CARD LABELS AND PROTECTIVE PLASTIC PANELS ON
TELEPHONES
4.1
Installing the Line Card Labels and Protective Plastic Panel on
the InfoSet Telephones
A peel off label and protective plastic panel are provided with each
telephone. The label helps identify the line keys and can be used to
record the line key designations associated with each line key on the
telephone.
1.
Print or type the line key designations for the keys on the provided
label.
Figure 4-41 Line Card Label for Infoset Telephones
2.
Peel the label from the paper backing and place it over the telephone
line keys. Be sure the protective plastic panel has been removed
before attaching the sticky-backed label.
System Manual
4 - 27
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
3.
If desired, peel the protective file from both sides of the protective
plastic panel.
Figure 4-42 Plastic Panel for InfoSet Telephones
4.
Locate two V-shaped tabs on each side of the lines keys on the face
plate. Gently bend the panel and slip it under the tabs. If inserted
properly, the panel will fit snugly against the face plate.
V-Shaped
Tables
V-Shaped
Tabs
Figure 4-43 Installing the Plastic Cover on the InfoSet Telephone
4 - 28
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
4.2
Installing the Line Card Labels and Protective Plastic Panel on
the Electra Elite Telephones
Line cards can be used to print the line key designations. They are then
placed on the telephone to provide a quick reference of line key
designations. Line cards can be changed as necessary. The plastic panel
is placed on top of the line card to hold it in place.
1.
Place the line card over the keys on the telephone.
2.
Place the tabs on the bottom of the plastic panel into the grooves at
the telephone bottom, and press the top right and left ends to secure
plastic panel to the telephone.
Figure 4-44 Installing Line Card and Plastic Panel on a Telephone
Figure 4-45 Installing Plastic Panel on a Telephone
System Manual
4 - 29
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
3.
To remove the plastic panel, lift the right corner, raise the panel, and
slide the bottom away from the telephone.
Figure 4-46 Removing the Plastic Panel from the Electra Elite
Telephone
Do not pull on the bottom of the plastic panel
to remove it; damage to the plastic panel could
result.
4.3
SLT(1)-U10 ADP (Single Line Telephone Adapter)
The single line telephone adapter provides an interface for Single line
telephones and other similar devices from an ESI ETU channel. This
adapter can be connected to any ESI port. A maximum of two single line
telephone adapters can be installed in the system.
4.3.1
Connecting the SLT(1)-U10 ADP to the System
1.
Connect one end of the RJ-11 to the ESI port on the KSU
and one end to the jack on the SLT Adapter marked ESI.
2.
Connect one end of a second RJ-11 to the jack marked TEL
on the SLT Adapter and the other end to the single line
telephone.
4 - 30
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
SLT(1)-U10 ADP
TEL
ESI
RJ-11
RJ-11
2-wire
2-wire
ESI
Figure 4-47 Connecting a Single Line Telephone to the System using an SLT(1)-U10 ADP
Modular Terminal
SLT(1)-U10 ADP
GN
BL
4
2
Green
T
Connect to any of the eight
Black
R
telephone line jacks
Red
To ESI
3
Yellow
5
RD
Y
Base Cord
ESI Port
Modular Terminal Connections
Green
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Red
Single Line Telephone Connections
Figure 4-48 Connecting the SLT(1)-U10 ADP
System Manual
4 - 31
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
4.3.2
Wall Mounting the SLT(1)-U10 ADP
1.
Remove the two screws from the top to open the SLT
adapter as shown in the diagram.
Figure 4-49 Removing the Screws from the SLT(1)-U10 ADP
2.
Using the two provided wood screws, attach the unit to the
wall. Close the unit and secure it with the two screws that
were previously removed.
Figure 4-50 Attaching the SLT(1)-U10 ADP to the Wall
4 - 32
Telephones
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
SECTION 5
WALL MOUNTING TEMPLATE FOR INFOSET TELEPHONES
When wall mounting InfoSet 408 telephones, use the template at the end of this chapter
to mark the location of the screws on the wall.
System Manual
4 - 33
NOTE: PRINTER WILL PROVIDE PERFORATED TEMPLATE FOR THIS PAGE. THIS IS
JUST AN EXAMPLE
Optional Equipment
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Optional equipment is available to enhance the InfoSet 408 system. These adapters
can be purchased separately from the system and added as your business needs
grow. The adapters listed in this chapter can only be installed on the Electra Elite
telephones.
A telephone can have up to three adapters installed at the same time. If attaching an
APR-U Unit, a CTA-U Unit, or an HFU-U Unit, an external power supply is required.
Only one power supply is needed even if more than one adapter is installed.
The CTA-U Unit requires system software version 2.0.
When an adapter is installed for the first time into a telephone, the base cover on the
telephone may have to be modified. The base cover has two access panels that are
removed before the cover can be closed over the adapters to complete the
installation.
SECTION 2
PREPARING THE TELEPHONE FOR ADAPTER INSTALLATION
Before adapters can be installed, the following steps must be performed to prepare
the telephone.
1.
Unplug the telephone cord from the telephone.
2.
Turn the telephone upside down. Push the tabs indicated in the diagram and
raise the inner area of the base plate.
Push Tabs
Push Tabs
Figure 5-1 Raising the Base Plate on an Electra Elite Telephone
System Manual
5 - 1
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
3.
Insert the flat head screwdriver into A and press straight down until the tab
unlocks.
Flat Head
Screwdriver
A
Tab
Figure 5-2 Unlocking the Tab on an Electra Elite Telephone
4.
Lightly press the right side of leg shown as B and insert the flat head screwdriver
at C. Press straight down until other the tab unlocks.
Flat Head
Screwdriver
C
B
Figure 5-3 Releasing the Right Tab on an Electra Elite Telephone
5 - 2
Optional Equipment
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
5.
Open and remove the bottom cover by rotating it counterclockwise.
Figure 5-4 Removing Bottom Cover on an Electra Elite Telephone
6.
Press tabs A and B to remove the dummy end from the base plate to provide for
adapter installation.
Figure 5-5 Removing the Base Plate Dummy End
System Manual
5 - 3
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
7.
Cut the dummy end in half as indicated in the diagram.
Figure 5-6 Cutting the Dummy End in Half
8.
If the adapter is installed in Connector 1 install dummy end B.
If the adapter is installed in Connector 2, install dummy end A in the other slot.
(Refer to Figure 5-7 Installing the Adapter in Connector 1 and Figure 5-8
Installing Dummy End B.)
Figure 5-7 Installing the Adapter in Connector 1
5 - 4
Optional Equipment
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Figure 5-8 Installing Dummy End B
SECTION 3
INSTALLING ADAPTERS
3.1
ACA-U Unit (AC Adapter)
This unit provides power to ancillary devices or Attendant Consoles. The
ACA-U Unit must be connected to an adapter that is installed on a
telephone. If more than one adapter is installed on a telephone, only one
ACA-U Unit is necessary.
The power requirements for the ACA-U Unit are:
Input: 120V AC, 60 Hz, 30W
Output: 24V DC, 750 mA
Polarity:
3.1.1
Connecting the ACA-U Unit
1.
Unplug the line cord from the telephone and unplug the
ACA-U Unit from the AC outlet. (Failing to do this can
damage the unit and/or the telephone.)
2.
Prepare the telephone for adapter installation as described
in Section 2 Preparing the Telephone for Adapter
Installation on page 5-1.
System Manual
5 - 5
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
3.
Locate the AC adapter plug on the ancillary device that is
connected to the bottom of the telephone and plug in the AC
adapter.
AC Adapter Plug
Figure 5-9 Connecting the ACA-U Unit
3.2
ADA-U Unit (Ancillary Device Adapter)
Ancillary Device Adapters allow connection of a tape recorder to Electra
Elite telephones.
When installing an ADA-U Unit, first connect the cables to the ADA-U Unit,
set the dip switches, and then install the ADA-U Unit on the telephone.
When installing the ADA-U Unit, the cables and switch settings should be
done before the unit is installed on the telephone.
3.2.1
Connecting Cables to the ADA-U Unit
Cable terminal connectors are located on the right side of the
ADA-U Unit. Cables should be connected on this unit before
installing the unit on the telephone.
1.
Cut off the plug on one end of the cable.
2.
Locate the adapter terminals on the right side of the unit as
illustrated in the diagram.
5 - 6
Optional Equipment
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Terminals
Figure 5-10 ADA-U Unit
3.
Remove the cap on the adapter terminal to expose the
metal receptacle. Push the cable in the applicable
receptacle, and replace the cap. Line up the slot on the cap
with the slot on the metal receptacle to ensure proper
contact.
Figure 5-11 Attaching Cables to the ADA-U Unit
4.
Insulate the end of the cable that needs to be shielded with
insulating tape.
Table 5-1 ADA-U Cable Connections provides a list of cable
connections to ADA-U ADP terminals and describes the
specifications for the terminals.
System Manual
5 - 7
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 5-1 ADA-U Cable Connections
Terminal
Cables to Connect
Terminal Specifications
Number
When warning tone is not being
Input Terminal: T1 and T2 are enabled for
sent from the recorder, connect
tone generating device when switches
T1
wire pair input from tone
SW1-3 and SW1- 4 are OFF.
generator to T1:T2. The
warning tones from the
(If switches SW1- 3 and SW1-4 are ON, a
generator are sent to T1:T2 on a
humming sound may be recorded due to
dedicated wire pair while the
impedance mismatch.)
speech path is sent from the
T2
ADA-U on T3:T4 over a
Input Impedance on T1 and T2: 100K
separate wire pair to the
recorder.
Input Level on T1 and T2: 15 dB ~ 40 dB
Connect recorder device wire
Input/Output Terminal:
pair speech input to T3:T4.
Refer to dip switch settings in Table 5-2
If the recorder used supplies a
ADA-U Unit Switch Settings.
T3:T4
warning tone, this tone may also
be sent over the T3:T4 wire pair
back to the terminal.
Connect the bare end of the
When a telephone is idle, this contact is
control cable.
closed. When the telephone goes off-
hook (using the handset, headset, or
T5
speakerphone), this contact is open.
If recorder owner manual specifies
start on open circuit, connect T5 and
T6.
Connect the shielded end of the
Provides common connection for control
T6
control cable.
cable.
Connect the bare end of the
When the telephone is idle, this contact is
control cable.
open. When the telephone is busy (using
the handset, headset, or speakerphone),
T7
this contact is closed.
If recorder owner manual specifies
start on closed circuit, connect T6 and
T7.
T8
Unused
T9
Unused
5 - 8
Optional Equipment
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 5-1 ADA-U Cable Connections (Continued)
Notes:
When recording in handsfree (half-duplex) mode using the built-in
speakerphone, the record warning tone may not be audible to the far-end party.
The transmit recording level is lower than the receiving voice level for intercom
calls; the transmit recording level for CO calls is normal.
Depending on the recording device(s), separate cables may be required for the
warning tone and speech path. In this case, connect the warning tone cables to
input terminals T1 and T2 on the ADA-U Unit. (T3 and T4 are used as the tape
recorder input.)
If remote control of the recorder is necessary, the record start/stop control is
provided by connecting to T5 (or T7) and T6 on the ADA-U Unit. (Connecting to
T5 or T7 is determined by the specifications of the recorder.)
If a warning Tone is provided from the recording equipment, it should be input via
T3 and T4 on ADA-U Unit. (Do not use T1 and T2 to input Beep Tone.)
Conversations cannot be recorded from terminals connected to an APR-U Unit.
Speakerphone calls through the HFU-U Unit cannot be recorded.
System Manual
5 - 9
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
3.2.2
Switch Settings
The DIP Switch is located at the bottom center of the ADA-U
Unit. The DIP Switch allows a technician to configure the board
to specific settings. Figure 5-12 ADA-U Unit Switch Settings
shows the default settings.
Terminals
Dip Switch
Default Settings
Figure 5-12 ADA-U Unit Switch Settings
The following switch settings should be made on the ADA-U Unit
to enable or disable the record start warning tone. Switch
settings should be made before installing the ADA-U Unit in the
telephone.
Table 5-2 ADA-U Unit Switch Settings
Switch
Setting
Description
If the ADA-U provides
control to the recorder,
SW11
On
SW1-1 should be set to On,
otherwise set it to Off.
SW12
Off
Leave Off
SW13
SW14
Warning Tone from
recording device over same
ON
ON
wire pair as speech path.
SW13
and
Warning Tone from
SW1-4
SW13
SW14
recorder or generator
equipment on dedicated
OFF
OFF
wire pair to recorder MIC
input.
5 - 10
Optional Equipment
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 5-2 ADA-U Unit Switch Settings (Continued)
Switch
Setting
Description
SW15
SW16
Input impedance is 600
SW15
OFF
ON
and
SW16
SW15
SW16
Input impedance is less
than 30
ON
OFF
If warning tone from any
SW17
ON
device is sent to telephone
SW18
Off
Leave Off
Do not connect T1 and T2 when switches SW1-3 and SW1-4 are ON.
3.2.3
Installing an ADA-U Unit on an Electra Elite Telephone
1.
Unplug the telephone cord from the telephone.
2.
Prepare telephone for adapter installation as described in
Section 2 Preparing the Telephone for Adapter Installation
on page 5-1.
3.
Plug the ADA-U Unit connector into the receptacle
connector on the back of the telephone. Snap the ADA-U
Unit into the hooks on the telephone to secure it.
Figure 5-13
Attaching the ADA-U Unit to an Electra Elite
Telephone
4.
Replace base plate.
System Manual
5 - 11
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
5.
Lead the audio cable out through the groove on the base
cover. Plug in the telephone cord.
Figure 5-14 Leading the Audio Cable out from the ADA-U Unit
3.3
APR-U Unit (Analog Port Ringer)
The Analog Port Adapter with ringing is the interface for installing single
line telephones, modems, and other compatible analog devices. The
APR-U Unit also generates ringing signals. By providing ring generation,
the user can install a personal fax machine or an answering machine for
convenience. Two user-adjustable switches are provided on the adapter;
one allows for 600 or a complex impedance interface to devices such as
a modem or single line telephone, the second switch (SW1) is set to
position 2. The APR-U Unit requires an AC Adapter. If a CTA-U Unit, or
HFU-U Unit and an APR-U Unit are both installed, only one AC Adapter is
required.
ACA-U Unit
(AC Adapter)
Figure 5-15 APR-U Unit
5 - 12
Optional Equipment
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
3.3.1
Installing an APR-U Unit on a Telephone
1.
Prepare telephone for adapter installation as described in
Section 2 Preparing the Telephone for Adapter Installation
on page 5-1.
2.
Plug the unit into the receptacle connector inside the base
plate.
Figure 5-16 Attaching the Unit to the Telephone
3.
Plug the cord of the ACA-U Unit (AC adapter) into the jack
on the APR-U Unit. Lead the telephone cord out through
the groove in the base as shown in the diagram.
Figure 5-17 Leading the Telephone Cord out from the Unit
System Manual
5 - 13
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
4.
Close the base plate, lead the AC adapter cord out through
the hole, and snap the cover in place.
Figure 5-18 Closing the Base Plate Cover
5.
Install a ferrite core (provided with the APR-U Unit) by
looping the line cord through the core between the terminal
(one inch from the terminal) and the ESI port. This core is
only used with the APR-U Unit.
6.
Plug in the power cord on the AC adapter and the telephone
cord in the jack.
3.3.2
Switch Settings
There are two switch settings on the APR-U Unit.
Figure 5-19 APR-U Unit Switches
5 - 14
Optional Equipment
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
The following table lists the switch settings for SW1 and SW3.
Table 5-3 APR-U Unit Switch Settings for SW1 and SW3
Switch
Description
SW11
Do not use
A Single Line Telephone and telephone are used
alternately.
SW12
(The telephone and the APR-U Unit share the same
B1 channel.)
Sets impedance to 600 for devices such as modems
SW31
or facsimile machines.
Used for complex impedance devices such as Single
SW32
Line Telephones.
3.3.3
Connecting Cables on the APR-U Unit
Plug the telephone cord from the single line telephone into the
modular jack on the APR-U Unit.
Limit the cable length from the APR-U Unit to the single line
telephone to a maximum of 50 feet.
Figure 5-20 Connecting Cables on the APR-U Unit
System Manual
5 - 15
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
3.4
HFU-U (BK)/(WH) Unit (Handsfree Unit)
The handsfree unit provides full-duplex handsfree communication. Large
areas may cause poor full-duplex operation. This unit comes with the
handsfree adapter and an external microphone. With terminal upside
down, facing from the bottom of the open cover, install this unit in
Telephone Slot 1.
Figure 5-21
HFU-U(BK)/(WH) Unit
3.4.1
Installing an HFU-U (BK)/(WH) Unit on a Telephone
Refer to 3.2.3 Installing an ADA-U Unit on an Electra Elite
Telephone on page 5-11. The instructions for installing these
units are the same.
3.4.2
Installing the External Microphone
An external microphone can be installed on the HFU-U (BK)/
(WH) Unit. These instructions apply to the external microphone
obtained from NEC. This microphone is equipped with a mute
button.
Figure 5-22 Microphone with Mute
5 - 16
Optional Equipment
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
1.
Plug the microphone cord into the jack on the HFU-U (BK)/
(WH) Unit as shown in the diagram.
The microphone should be between one foot and three feet
away from the telephone.
Minimum 1
Foot from
Telephone
Figure 5-23 Attaching a Microphone to a Telephone
3.4.3
Switch Settings
The HFU-U (BK)/(WH) Unit uses two position switches SW1 and
SW2 on the HFU-U (BK)/(WH) Unit.
Figure 5-24
HFU-U(BK)/(WH) Unit Switches
System Manual
5 - 17
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
The following table lists the SW1 and SW2 switch settings.
Table 5-4 HFU-U Unit Switch Settings
SW1
SW2
Description
Position
Position
Position
Position
1
2
1
2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Full Duplex (Default)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Half Duplex (6db mix ratio)
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Half Duplex (12db mix ratio)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Half Duplex (18db mix ratio)
Full Duplex: In some large areas or noisy locations half duplex should be
used. There are limits to the echo canceling ability of the HFU-U.
Half Duplex: If voice clipping occurs, use a lower decibel setting.
3.5
CTA-U Unit (Computer Telephony Application)
Computer Telephony Application allows an Electra Elite telephone to be
connected to a PC. The PC can then be used to perform all of the
functions of the telephone by using a TAPI-compatible application
software.
The CTA-U Unit requires system software version 2.0.
Figure 5-25 Attaching an Electra Elite Telephone to a PC
5 - 18
Optional Equipment
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
The CTA-U Unit is attached to the bottom of the Electra Elite telephone.
ACA-U Unit (AC
Adapter)
Figure 5-26 CTA-U Unit
3.5.1
Installing the CTA-U Unit
1.
Prepare telephone for adapter installation as described in
Section 2 Preparing the Telephone for Adapter Installation
on page 5-1.
2.
Plug the unit into the receptacle connector inside the base
plate on the telephone.
Figure 5-27 Attaching the Unit to the Telephone
3.
Close the base plate.
System Manual
5 - 19
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
3.5.2
Connecting the Cables on the CTA-U Unit
Connect the RS-232C cable from the computer to the connector
on the CTA-U Unit as shown in the diagram.
Figure 5-28
Connecting the RS-232C Cable to the CTA-U
Unit on the Telephone
3.5.3
Installing the Driver on the PC
Using the setup disk provided with the CTA-U Unit install the
driver on your PC. Refer to the CTA installation Guide for
instructions on installing CTA setup disks.
5 - 20
Optional Equipment
Telephone Programming
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
When the system is initially installed, it is fully operational with the preset default
settings. Users can customize the system by changing system programming values
using either telephone programming or PC programming. This chapter provides
detailed instructions for programming from a telephone.
Telephone programming is designed primarily for experienced users.
Therefore, if you are a first-time user, we strongly recommend that you use PC
programming instead of telephone programming.
It should be noted that only one telephone can be in programming mode at a time. If
another telephone user attempts to access programming mode, that telephone is
blocked from entering programming mode.
The following InfoSet and Electra Elite telephone types can be used as programming
telephones.
DTB-16D-1(BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-16D-2(BK)/(WH) TEL
DTU-32D-2(BK)/(WH) TEL
Only telephone ports 1 and 2 (normally extensions 10 or 11) can be used to
enter telephone program mode.
S
ECTION 2
ENTERING PROGRAMMING MODE
Once you have entered into programming mode you can access the various
programming functions by either using the navigational keys or by manually entering
the function number (e.g., 001-1, 002, 220, etc.). The function number provides
access to the area you want to program. Table 6-1 Navigational Keys for Telephone
Programming provides a list of keys you can use to navigate the system. Table 6-2
Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart provides a complete list of all of the
programming functions.
To program the system using a telephone, you must first enter programming mode.
1.
Press
.
2.
Press .
System Manual
6 - 1
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
3.
Dial
. The display shows the information for function number
000-1.
2.1
Programming Guidelines
When programming you should understand the following:
The telephone display indicates the function number, function group
name and default settings.
Function
Function
Number
Group Name
Default
Settings
When function numbers are grouped (e.g., 001-1 ~ 001-9), all of the
function numbers are displayed at the same time. To change
between the default value and the alternate value, press the dial pad
key that corresponds to the last digit of the function number you are
changing.
For example:
When you access the function number for 001-1~001-9. The system
displays:
If you want to change the programming value for Function 001-4,
press on the dial pad. When " appears on the display, you
have changed to the alternate programming value for that function.
The default value is displayed if this is the first time you are using the
system. If the system has been previously programmed, the
alternate value may be displayed instead of the default value. It is
important to note that the series of numbers is displayed in
descending order (987654321).
The following navigational keys are used. Note that the Electra Elite
telephones do not have a SPD key. The InfoSet telephones use the
and
keys to perform many of the same functions that
thekey does on the Electra Elite telephones. Throughout this
chapter any differences are noted where necessary.
6 - 2
Telephone Programming
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 6-1 Navigational Keys for Telephone Programming
Key
Description
Returns to the previous function. Repeatedly pressing this key
allows you to scroll backward through the function numbers.
Forwards to the next function. Repeatedly pressing this key
allows you to scroll forward through the function numbers.
Clears the display allowing you to enter a function number using
the dialpad.
Exits programming mode and returns the telephone to normal
operation.
The key on InfoSet telephones and
on Electra Elite
telephones is used to enter a dash into a telephone number.
Clears data that was entered using the dialpad.
The line keys are numbered differently for the InfoSet and Electra
Elite telephones. The diagram below illustrates these differences. It
is important to keep these differences in mind when programming.
InfoSet Telephone
Electra Elite Telephone
13
14
15
16
1 2 3
4
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
Typically, line keys 1~4 are used for trunk line assignment. However,
any unused line keys can be assigned as one-touch/feature access
keys.
System Manual
6 - 3
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
S
ECTION 3
PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS
The table provides a complete list of all of the programming functions. These are
listed in order by function number. The table consists of four columns, a brief
explanation of each column is listed below.
Function Number
Lists the number used by the system to access the programming functions.
Function Name/Telephone Display
Lists the function name and shows how the function appears in the display of
the telephone. Since there is limited space in the telephone display, the
functions are abbreviated and will not match the function name. To
distinguish the function name from the telephone display, the following font is
used to indicate the display:
. The telephone display
typically consists of two lines. The first line is the abbreviation and the
second line is the default setting. If your system has been previously
programmed, the number on your display may be different from the one
provided in the table.
Description
Provides a brief explanation of the function.
Programming Values
Lists the programmable options for the function. Note that the default values
are displayed in bold typeface.
6 - 4
Telephone Programming
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
001-1
Internal Call Notification
Used to indicate how users are
1 = Voice
notified of internal calls. If Voice is = Signal Tone
selected, users can voice
announce calls. If Signal Tone is
selected, the system sends an
audible tone to the called party.
Programming Note:
To change the default setting for Functions 001-1~001-9, press the dialpad key
that corresponds to the number you want to change. For example, to change
the setting for 001-9, press
. When you press the number, the system
toggles between the two programming values.
001-2
Speed Dial Assignment
Used to assign the number of
2 = 80 System/20 Personal
speed dial memory locations used = 200 Slots/0 Personal
for system (common) speed dialing
and telephone (individual) speed
dialing.
001-3
One-Touch Key Assignment
Used to indicate if a one-touch key 3 = Call Notification
is assigned for Call Notification
- = Not Used
(DSS).
Programming Note:
On InfoSet or Electra Elite telephones, any unused line keys can be assigned
as one-touch/feature access keys.
001-4
Ringing Transfer
Used to enable or disable ringing
4 = Enabled
transfer for external calls. If
= Disabled
enabled, the called party hears
ringing. If disabled, the called party
does not hear ringing and must
press the flashing external line key
to answer the call.
001-5
Automatic Transfer
Used to enable or disable the
5 = Enabled
automatic transfer function. If
= Disabled
enabled, the calling party hangs up
and the call is automatically
transferred. If disabled, the calling
party must remain off-hook until the
called party answers.
System Manual
6 - 5
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
001-6
Trunk Line Direct Access
Used to assign how an outside line 6 = Enabled
is accessed. If enabled, the user
= Disabled
can press the designated line to
directly access the outside line. If
disabled, the user must press the
designated line key and then go
off-hook to access an external line.
001-7
One-Touch Key Direct Access Used to assign how a one-touch
- = Disabled
for Outgoing Calls
key accesses an outside line. If
7 = Enabled
enabled, the user can press the
one-touch key, the outside line is
directly accessed and the number
is dialed. If disabled, the user must
first manually access the outside
line before pressing the one-touch
key.
001-8
One-Touch Key Duplication
This feature is used to set a
8 = Enabled
Assignment
one-touch feature key. If enabled, = Disabled
the one-touch feature key
assignment is duplicated to all
other telephones in the system.
Programming Note:
This function can only be set from the telephone attached to telephone ports 1
or 2 (attendant telephone). When using the InfoSet telephones, line keys
(09~16) can be assigned as one-touch/feature access keys. When using
Electra Elite telephones, the DTU-32D TEL must be used to set this feature
and the one-touch/feature access keys (not the line keys) must be used to set
one-touch key duplication.
001-9
Single Line Telephone
Used to assign how the hookflash
9 = Used for Hold
Hookflash Assignment
is used on a single line telephone.
= Used for Hookflash
002-1
Music Source for Music On
Used to indicate whether the
1 = Not Connected
Hold
system is connected to an external = Connected
source for Music on Hold.
Programming Note:
To change the default setting for Functions 002-1~002-9, press the dialpad key
that corresponds to the number you want to change. For example, to change
the setting for 002-9, press
. When you press the number, the system
toggles between the two programming values.
002-2
External Speaker Connection Used to indicate if an external
2= Connected
speaker is connected to the
= Not Connected
system.
6 - 6
Telephone Programming
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
002-3
External Paging Tone
Used to assign if an audible tone is 3 = Enabled
Assignment
sent from the external speaker
= Disabled
when call paging is used.
002-4
Internal All Call Page Tone
Used to enable or disable the ability 4 = Enabled
Assignment
to receive an all call page tone
= Disabled
system-wide.
002-5
Barge-In Notification Tone
Used to enable or disable an
5 = Enabled (Tone Sent)
audible tone when barging into a
= Disabled (No Tone Sent)
conversation.
002-6
Background Music Source
Indicates whether a background
6 = Connected
music source is connected to the
= Not Connected
system.
002-7
Time Format for Telephone
Selects the format used when
7 = 12-Hour
Display
displaying time on the telephone.
(12:00 a.m. ~ 11:59 p.m.)
= 24-Hour
(0:00 ~ 23:59)
002-8
Private Call
Assigns an external line for private 8 = Private Call
use. When used, the assigned line = Remove Private Call
cannot be accessed by another
telephone user and no other
telephone user has the call
indication on their telephone.
002-9
Station Message Detail
Enables or disables Station
9 = Enabled
Recording
Message Detail Recording
= Disabled
(SMDR). SMDR provides detailed
telephone usage records.
003
Hold Warning Tone Timer
Sets the timer that is used to
0 = 1 minute
indicate a call has been on hold
1 = 2 minutes
past the time set.
2 = 3 minutes
3 = 4 minutes
4 = No Limit (No warning indication
sent)
004
Exclusive Hold Warning Tone Sets the timer that is used to
0 = 1 minute
Timer
indicate a call has been on
1 = 2 minutes
exclusive hold past the time set.
2 = 3 minutes
3 = 4 minutes
4 = No Limit (No warning indication
sent)
System Manual
6 - 7
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
005
Automatic Redial Timer
Used to set three parameters
Number
associated with the Automatic
Wait
of
Redial feature. Duration indicates
Duration Duration Times
the amount of time the system
0 =
5 sec.
5 sec.
7
continues to redial the number.
1 =
10 sec.
30 sec.
7
Wait Duration is the amount of time 2 =
15 sec.
60 sec.
7
the system waits between call
3 =
15 sec.
90 sec.
7
attempts. Number of Times
indicates the number of times the
system redials to a busy number or
when there is no answer.
006
Hookflash Duration
Used to specify time it takes for the 0 = 40 ms.
5 = 600 ms.
system to recognize the signal as a 1 = 90 ms.
6 = 800 ms.
hookflash. A hookflash can be
2 = 140 ms.
7 = 1 sec.
3 = 200 ms.
8 = 1.5 sec.
generated by pressing the
4 = 400 ms.
9 = 2 sec.
hookswitch or by pressing a key on
a multiline telephone.
007
Disconnect Detection
Used to specify the time the system 0 = No Detection
5 = 250 ms.
Duration
waits before a call is considered
1 = 50 ms.
6 = 300 ms.
disconnected.
2 = 100 ms.
7 = 350 ms.
3 = 150 ms.
8 = 400 ms.
4 = 200 ms.
9 = 500 ms.
008
Call Forward No Answer
Indicates the time between when a 0 = 10 sec.
3 = 25 sec.
Duration
call is received and the time the
1 = 15 sec.
4 = 30 sec.
system recognizes that there is no 2 = 20 sec.
5 = 60 sec.
answer before the call has been
forwarded.
009
Outgoing Call Line Selection
Used to assign the type of line the 0 = Key Function (KF)
system connects to when 9
1 = Multifunction (MF) Analog Only
!!
2 = Multifunction (MF) Analog
(outside call access code) is used,
Prioritized
is pressed, or a one-touch key 3 = Multifunction (MF) ISDN
is pressed.
Prioritized
If KF is specified, the line key must
be pressed to access a trunk line.
If analog only or analog prioritized
is selected, an analog trunk line is
selected first. If ISDN prioritized is
selected, an ISDN line is selected
first.
6 - 8
Telephone Programming
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
010
Outgoing Call Access Code
Used to specify the code (number) 9 (2-digit access code)
for PBX
dialed to access an outside line
Maximum digits = 6 (3 numbers and 3
from a PBX.
pauses)
"
Programming Note:
For Function 010, press
on the InfoSet telephone and
on the
Electra Elite telephone to enter a pause. You cannot enter two consecutive
pauses, there must be a number between a pause.
011
Background Music
Indicates where background music 0 = External Speaker
Destination
is heard.
1 = Telephone Speaker
2 = External Speaker and Telephone
"!
Speaker
3 = Background Music Not Heard
012
Music On Hold Melody
Used to select the melody used for 0 = "Je te veus"
the Music on Hold.
1 = Minuet
014
Night Mode Start Time
Used to select the time of day the
Not Set
(Assignment 1)
system switches from day mode to Use 24-hour mode to set the time
night mode.
(00:00~23:59).
#
Programming Note:
When setting the time for Functions 014~017, use line key 13 to move the
cursor to the left and 16 to move the cursor to the right.
015
Night Mode End Time
Used to select the time of day the
Not Set
(Assignment 1)
system switches from night mode
Use 24-hour mode to set the time
back to day mode.
(00:00 ~ 23:59).
#
016
Night Mode Start Time
Used to select the time of day the
Not Set
(Assignment 2)
system switches from day mode to Use 24-hour mode to set the time
night mode.
(00:00 ~ 23:59).
#
017
Night Mode End Time
Used to select the time of day the
Not Set
(Assignment 2)
system switches from night mode
Use 24-hour mode to set the time
back to day mode.
(00:00 ~ 23:59).
#
System Manual
6 - 9
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
018-1
Night Mode Monday
Used to assign night mode for
0 = Continuous Day Mode
Monday.
1 = Night Mode Assignment 1
!
2 = Night Mode Assignment 2
$%&'(#
3 - Continuous Night Mode (Holidays)
018-2
Night Mode Tuesday
Used to assign night mode for
Tuesday.
!
)*+&'(#
018-3
Night Mode Wednesday
Used to assign night mode for
Wednesday.
!
*&%*+&'(#
018-4
Night Mode Thursday
Used to assign night mode for
!
Thursday.
,)-+&'(#
018-5
Night Mode Friday
Used to assign night mode for
!
Friday.
-.&'(#
018-6
Night Mode Saturday
Used to assign night mode for
!
Saturday.
'/)-&'(#
018-7
Night Mode Sunday
Used to assign night mode for
!
Sunday.
)%&'(#
Programming Note:
When scrolling to the next day of the week, press
.
It is important to note that programming values 1 and 2 are only available if
Functions 014 and 015 (Night Mode Assignment 1) or 016 and 017 (Night
Mode Assignment 2) have been programmed. If you attempt to enter 1 or 2
when Functions 014~017 have not been programmed, the system simply
ignores the entry.
6 - 10
Telephone Programming
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
019-1
Hunt Group Pilot Number 10 Used to assign extension numbers 1 = Hunt Group Pilot Number Valid
10~19 to Hunt Group Pilot Number = Hunt Group Pilot Number Invalid
10.
A hunt group consists of a series of
extensions that are organized so that
if the first extension is busy the system
hunts for the next extension in the
series that is available.
Programming Note:
To change the default setting for Functions 019-1~019-5, press the dialpad key
that corresponds to the number you want to change. For example, to change
the setting for 019-3, press
. When you press the number, the system
toggles between the two programming values.
019-2
Hunt Group Pilot Number 20
Used to assign extension numbers 2 = Hunt Group Pilot Number Valid
20~29 to Hunt Group Pilot Number = Hunt Group Pilot Number Invalid
20.
019-3
Hunt Group Pilot Number 30
Used to assign extension numbers 3 = Hunt Group Pilot Number Valid
30~39 to Hunt Group Pilot Number = Hunt Group Pilot Number Invalid
30.
019-4
Hunt Group Pilot Number 40
Used to assign extension numbers 4 = Hunt Group Pilot Number Valid
40~49 to Hunt Group Pilot Number = Hunt Group Pilot Number Invalid
40.
019-5
Hunt Group Pilot Number 50
Used to assign extension numbers 5 = Hunt Group Pilot Number Valid
50~59 to Hunt Group Pilot Number = Hunt Group Pilot Number Invalid
50.
020
Restricted Dialing Table 1
Used to record numbers that users Enter the numbers (maximum 8
are not allowed to dial (e.g., long
digits) that are restricted dialing.
distance numbers, 900 numbers,
#
etc.). The table allows eight
#
numbers to be entered and the
maximum length of each number is
021
Restricted Dialing Table 2
eight digits.
#
System Manual
6 - 11
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
Programming Note:
When setting the restricted dial number for Functions 020~023, use line keys
13 to move the cursor to the left and 16 to move the cursor to the right.
To advance to the next location where the restricted dial numbers can be
entered, press
.
To clear an entry, press
. Re-enter the data.
To enter an "X", which indicates to the system to use any number where X is
found, press
. An "s" should appear in the second line of the display to
indicate shift mode. To enter an "X", which indicates a wildcard number,
press
. To enter "N", which indicates numbers 2~9, press
. To
enter an * or #, press
or(you must not be in shift mode).
022
Authorized Dialing Table 1
Used to record numbers that users Enter the numbers (maximum 8
are permitted to dial (e.g., certain
digits) that are authorized dialing.
local or long distance numbers).
#
The table allows eight numbers to
#
be entered and the maximum
#
length of each number is eight
#
digits.
023
Authorized Dialing Table 2
#
024
Print Format
Used to indicate how the number is 0 = Only Print Prefix - Mask Last 4
printed on the Station Message
Digits
Detail Report. The options include 1 = Entire Number
printing the entire number or just
printing the prefix and masking the
last four digits.
025
Baud Rate to Printer
Used to assign the baud rate for
0 = 1200 bps
3 = 9600 bps
outputting to the printer.
1 = 2400 bps
4 = 19200 bps
2 = 4800 bps
5 = 38400 bps
026
Stop Bit for Printer
Used to assign the stop bit for
0 = 2 Stop Bits
outputting to the printer.
1 = 1 Stop Bit
027
Disconnect Signal Duration
Used to assign the duration of the
0 = 0.3 sec.
5 = 2.0 sec.
disconnect signal when a caller
1 = 0.5 sec.
6 = 2.5 sec.
hangs up.
2 = 0.7 sec.
7 = 3.0 sec.
3 = 1.0 sec.
8 = 3.5 sec.
4 = 1.5 sec.
9 = 4.0 sec.
6 - 12
Telephone Programming
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
060-1~060-3 For future use
061~064
For future use
101
Telephone Number Display
Used to assign the trunk line
Not Assigned
for Trunk Line 1
telephone number that is displayed
when making and answering trunk Maximum of 13 digits
line calls.
102
Telephone Number Display
for Trunk Line 2
103
Telephone Number Display
for Trunk Line 3
104
Telephone Number Display
for Trunk Line 4
105
Trunk Line Function
Used to indicate how the trunk line 1~4 = Allows Outgoing/Incoming
is used; for outgoing and incoming Calls
calls or for incoming calls only.
= Incoming Calls Only
Programming Note:
For Functions 105~107, 109~110, 119, and 124~125, The trunk numbers are
listed in descending order (4321). The defaults settings are shown in the
display. To change the default setting for trunk numbers 1~4, press the dialpad
key that corresponds to the trunk number you want to change. For example, to
change the setting for trunk number 3, press
. The number blinks
indicating your selection. Press the number that corresponds to the
programming value.
106
Automatic Release of Trunk
Used to indicate if the system
1~4 = Automatic Release
Line
automatically releases the trunk
= No Automatic Release
line when the called party
disconnects.
System Manual
6 - 13
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
107
Trunk Line Type
Used to indicate the trunk line type; 1~4 = Central Office Line
from a Central Office or from a
= PBX Line
PBX.
109
Trunk Line Dialing Type
Used to indicate the type of dialing; 0 = Uninstalled
Dial Pulse (10 pps/20 pps), Dual
1 = Dual Tone Multifrequency
Tone Multifrequency, ISDN, or
(DTMF) or ISDN
2 = Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps
uninstalled.
3 = Dial Pulse (DP) 20 pps
DP = Rotary Dial
DTMF = Touchtone
ISDN = Integrated Services Digital
Network which allows simultaneous
voice and data transmission
110
Touchtone Signal Duration
Used to assign the length of the
0 = 400 ms. (duration)/100 ms.
and Pause Interval
touchtone (Dual Tone
(pause)
Multifrequency) signal and the
1 = 100 ms (duration)/70 ms (pause)
pause time before the next signal is
sent. This is used when DTMF is
assigned to the trunk line and Dial
Pulse (DP) is assigned for the
switching signal.
119
Ring Tone Type
Used to select either a low or high 1~4 = Low
ringing tone.
= High
!
124
External Speaker Ringing for Used to assign immediate or
0 = 0 sec.
3 = 30 sec.
Day Mode
delayed ringing to the external
1 = 10 sec.
4 = 60 sec.
speaker to indicate an incoming call 2 = 20 sec.
5 = No Tone
during day mode.
125
External Speaker Ringing for Used to assign immediate or
Night Mode
delayed ringing to the external
speaker to indicate an incoming call
during night mode.
6 - 14
Telephone Programming
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
140
Direct Calling for Day Mode
Used to indicate an extension
Blank = No Assignment
on Trunk Line 1 (DIT
number (or voice mail number) that Extension Number 10~59
Assignment)
is used for direct calls (i.e., calls
that are not routed through an
attendant). This assignment
applies to day mode.
141
Direct Calling for Day Mode
on Trunk Line 2 (DIT
Assignment)
142
Direct Calling for Day Mode
on Trunk Line 3 (DIT
Assignment)
143
Direct Calling for Day Mode
on Trunk Line 4 (DIT
Assignment)
144
Direct Calling for Night Mode Used to indicate an extension
Blank = No Assignment
on Trunk Line 1 (DIT
number (or external voice mail
Extension Number 10~59
Assignment)
number) that is used for direct calls
(i.e., calls that are not routed
through an attendant). This
assignment applies to night mode.
145
Direct Calling for Night Mode
on Trunk Line 2 (DIT
Assignment)
146
Direct Calling for Night Mode
on Trunk Line 3 (DIT
Assignment)
147
Direct Calling for Night Mode
on Trunk Line 4 (DIT
Assignment)
System Manual
6 - 15
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
148
Direct Calling Answer Delay
Used to specify the duration of the 0 = 0 sec.
4 = 30 sec.
Time (DIT Answer Delay
delay of incoming direct calls (DIT). 1 = 5 sec.
5 = 40 sec.
Time)
This applies to calls received on a 2 = 10 sec.
6 = 50 sec.
3 = 20 sec.
7 = 60 sec.
line assigned for direct calling
(DIT).
Programming Note:
For Functions 148 and 149, the trunk numbers are listed in descending order
(4321). To change the default setting for trunk numbers 1~4, press the dialpad
key that corresponds to the trunk number you want to change. For example, to
change the setting for trunk number 3, press
. The number blinks
indicating your selection. Press the number that corresponds to the
programming value.
149
Direct Calling Answer Delay
Used to indicate whether the
1~4 = Enabled
for Night Mode (DIT Answer
answer delay for incoming direct
= Disabled
Delay)
calls that are received in night
mode are enabled or disabled.
202
Off-Hook Ringing Tone
Used to indicate whether a ringing 1~8 = Enabled
tone is sent when the user is
2 = Disabled
!
engaged in a conversation. This
tone signals the user that there is
an incoming call (on a trunk line).
Programming Note:
For Functions 202~203, the telephone ports are displayed in descending order
(87654321). To change the default setting, press the dialpad key that
corresponds to the port you want to change. For example, if you want to
change the setting for port 7, press
. When you press the number, the
system toggles between the two programming values.
203
Trunk Line Barge-In
Used to indicate (for each
1~8 = Enabled
telephone) if barge-in is allowed
= Disabled
"!
when the user is engaged in a call
using a trunk line.
6 - 16
Telephone Programming
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
206
Extension Number
Used to assign an extension
Ports 1~10 = Ext. 10~17
Assignment
number to each telephone in the
Ports 11~12 = Ext. 50~51 (Voice Mail)
system.
Available Extension Numbers = 10~59
#
Programming Note:
For Function 206, the telephone port number and extension number are
displayed. To change the extension number for the displayed port, press the
numbers on the dial pad that correspond to the extension number. To advance
to the next station number, press
. You can assign eight ports to multiline
telephones, two ports to single line telephones, or two ports can be used for
voice mail.
207
Single Line Port Type
Used to designate whether the
0 = Not Connection
single line port is connected to a
1 = Single Line Telephone
single line telephone.
This function is only valid when
a SLI(2)-B10 ETU is installed
in the KSU.
Programming Note:
For Function 207, the two telephone ports are displayed. To change the default
setting for port numbers 1~2, press the dialpad key that corresponds to the port
number you want to change. For example, to change the setting for single line
port 2, press
. When you press the number, the system toggles between
the two programming values.
208
Single Line Dialing Type
Used to assign the dialing type for 1~10 = Dual Tone Multifrequency
single line telephones. The options (Touchtone)
are rotary (Dial Pulse) or touchtone = Dial Pulse (Rotary)
(Dual Tone Multifrequency).
Programming Note:
For Functions 208~211 and 213~214, the 10 telephone ports are displayed in
descending order (0987654321). To change the default settings for ports 1~10,
press the dialpad key that corresponds to the port number you want to change.
For example, if you want to change the setting for port 10, press
. When
you press the number, the system toggles between the two programming
values.
These functions apply to the eight allowed ESI ports and the two SLI ports.
Even though it is possible to assign all 10 ports as single line telephones
using Function 208, this is not recommended. If you are going to use a
telephone to program the system, one telephone must be a multiline
telephone.
System Manual
6 - 17
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
209
Outgoing Call Priority Mode
Used to select the line that is
1~10 = External Line
seized first when the user goes off- = Internal Line
hook. The system can be
programmed to either seize an
internal or external line for multiline
telephones and single line
telephones.
210
Doorphone 1 Tone for Day
Used to assign a specified
1~10 = Tone
Mode
telephone to produce a tone
= No Tone
(chime) signal when the doorphone
receives a call. This assignment
applies to day mode for multiline
and single line telephones.
211
Doorphone 2 Tone for Day
Mode
213
Doorphone 1 Tone for Night
Used to assign a specified
1~2 = Tone (this is the default setting
Mode
telephone to produce a tone
for telephones 1 and 2)
(chime) signal when the doorphone = No Tone (this is the default
setting for telephones 3~10)
receives a call. This assignment
applies to night mode for multiline
and single line telephones.
214
Doorphone 2 Tone for Night
Mode
6 - 18
Telephone Programming
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
216
Handsfree Assignment
Used to assign (for each multiline
1~8 = Enabled
telephone) handsfree operation.
= Disabled
Programming Note:
For Functions 216~218, the telephone ports are displayed in descending order
(87654321). To change the default setting, press the dialpad key that
corresponds to the port you want to change. For example, if you want to
change the setting for port 7, press
. When you press the number, the
system toggles between the two programming values.
217
Internal All Call Paging Tone
Used to enable or disable call
1~8 = Enabled
paging tone for each multiline
= Disabled
!
telephone. The page will still be
displayed on each multiline
telephone and can be answered by
any multiline telephone in the
system.
218
Headset Connection
Used to indicate if a headset is
1~8 = Not Connected
connected an Electra Elite multiline = Connected
telephone.
219
Restricted Calling for External Used to restrict outgoing calls on a = Not Restricted
Calls
specific line. Restrictions can be
1~10 = Restricted
set for multiline telephones and
!
single line telephones.
Programming Note:
For Function 219, the telephone ports are displayed in descending order
(0987654321). To change the default settings for ports 1~10, press the dialpad
key that corresponds to the port you want to change. For example, if you want
to change the setting for port 10, press
. When you press the number, the
system toggles between the two programming values.
220
Restricted Dialing Table
Specifies which Restricted Dialing 0 = Not Used
Selection
Table (1 and 2) is used for each
1 = Table 1 (Table assigned using
telephone in the system (includes
function 020)
"
2 = Table 2 (Table assigned using
both multiline and single line
function 021)
telephones).
3 = Use both Tables 1 and 2
Programming Note:
For Functions 220~222, the telephone ports are displayed in descending order
(0987654321). To change the default values, press the dialpad key that
corresponds to the port you want to change. For example, to change the setting
for port 10 press
. For Functions 220 and 221, press the number that
corresponds to the programming value. For Function 222, the system toggles
between the two programming values when you press the number.
System Manual
6 - 19
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
221
Authorized Dialing Table
Specifies which Authorized Dialing 0 = Not Used
Selection
Table (1 and 2) is used for each
1 = Table 1 (Table assigned using
telephone in the system (includes
function 020)
"
2 = Table 2 (Table assigned using
both multiline and single line
function 021)
telephones).
3 = Use both Tables 1 and 2
222
Authorized Dialing for
Used to assign specific system
= Denied (number cannot be
External Speed Dial Calls
(common) speed dial memory
dialed)
locations (60~99) that users are
1~10 = Allowed (number can be
dialed)
permitted to dial. When allowed,
any number found in the authorized
table (such as a long distance
number) overrides any restriction
assigned in 020 (Restricted Dialing
Table 1) and 021 (Restricted
Dialing Table 2). These speed
dial memory locations are fixed and
can be used by multiline and single
line telephones users.
223
Automatic Outgoing Calling
Used to allow or deny automatic
1~10 = Allowed (outgoing calls can
outgoing calling when the dialed
be made)
number is not found in one of the
= Denied (outgoing calls cannot
be made)
Restricted or Authorized Dialing
Tables (020 ~ 023).
Programming Note:
For Function 223, the telephones ports are displayed in descending order
(87654321). To change the default setting, press the dialpad key that
corresponds to the port you want to change. For example, if you want to
change the setting for port 7, press
. When you press the number, the
system toggles between the two programming values.
6 - 20
Telephone Programming
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
301
Day Ringing for Trunk Line 1 Used to assign the duration of the
0 = 0 sec.
3 = 30 sec.
delay between the time the call is
1 = 10 sec.
4 = 60 sec.
!
received and the time the ringing
2 = 20 sec.
5 = No Tone
tone is heard. This option allows
you to delay ringing to another
302
Day Ringing for Trunk Line 2 telephone. This assignment is for
day mode.
!
303
Day Ringing for Trunk Line 3
!
304
Day Ringing for Trunk Line 4
!
311
Night Ringing for Trunk Line 1 Used to assign the duration of the
0 = 0 sec.
3 = 30 sec.
delay between the time the call is
1 = 10 sec.
4 = 60 sec.
!
received and the time the ringing
2 = 20 sec.
5 = No Tone
tone is heard. This option allows
you to delay ringing to another
312
Night Ringing for Trunk Line 2 telephone. This assignment is for
night mode.
!
313
Night Ringing for Trunk Line 3
!
314
Night Ringing for Trunk Line 4
!
System Manual
6 - 21
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
331
Automatic Line Selection for Used to designate which line keys 1~10 = Enabled
Trunk Line 1
are used for automatic line key
= Disabled
selection. This is used to
!
automatically seize a line by
pressing
(InfoSet telephones)
332
Automatic Line Selection for
or
or going off-hook and
Trunk Line 2
dialing the appropriate outside line
access code. This is designated for
!
each telephone.
333
Automatic Line Selection for
Trunk Line 3
!
334
Automatic Line Selection for
Trunk Line 4
!
Programming Note:
For Functions 331~334, the telephone ports are displayed in descending order
(0987654321). To change the default values, press the dialpad key that
corresponds to the port you want to change. For example, to change the setting
for port 10 press
. When you press the number, the system toggles
between the two programming values.
6 - 22
Telephone Programming
InfoSet 408
Issue 1A
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
341
Automatic Answering using
Used to enable or disable the ability 1 = Enabled
Trunk Line 1
to answer an incoming call by going = Disabled
off-hook. If enabled, the user
answers the call by going off-hook.
If disabled, the user answers the
call by going off-hook and pressing
342
Automatic Answering using
the line key where the call is
Trunk Line 2
ringing. Only multiline telephones
can be assigned this option.
343
Automatic Answering using
Trunk Line 3
344
Automatic Answering using
Trunk Line 4
Programming Note:
For Functions 341~344, the telephones ports are displayed in descending
order (87654321). To change the default setting, press the dialpad key that
corresponds to the port you want to change. For example, if you want to
change the setting for port 7, press
. When you press the number, the
system toggles between the two programming values.
System Manual
6 - 23
Issue 1A
InfoSet 408
Table 6-2 Programming Functions Quick Reference Chart (Continued)
Function
Function Name and
Description
Programming Values
Number
Telephone Display
351
Restricting Outgoing Calls for Used to enable or disable (for each 1~10 = Outgoing Calls Enabled
Trunk Line 1
telephone) the ability to make
= Outgoing Calls Disabled
outgoing calls when 105 - Trunk
Line Function is set to "Outgoing/
Incoming Calls." This option can
be used with multiline and single
352
Restricting Outgoing Calls for line telephones.
Trunk